Texas Instruments Voyage 200 Скачать руководство пользователя страница 130

Страница: 130 / 1008

Previews

130

Text Operations

Start a new

Text Editor

session. Then practice using the

Text Editor

by typing whatever

text you want. As you type, practice moving the text cursor and correcting any typos you
may enter.

8. Leave the Program I/O screen and return

to the Home screen.

You can also press

, or

to return to the Home screen.

Press

‡

Steps and keystrokes

Display

1. Start a new session of the

Text Editor

Press 3

2. Create a text variable called

TEST

, which

will automatically store any text you enter
in the new session.

Use the

MAIN

folder, shown as the

default on the

NEW

dialog box.

After typing in an input box such as

Variable

, you must press

twice.

Press

TEST

Steps and keystrokes

Display

Содержание Voyage 200

Страница 1: ...1 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator Graphing Calculator Graphing Calculator Graphing Calculator ...

Страница 2: ...A FCC Information Concerning Radio Frequency Interference This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed a...

Страница 3: ...ced radio television technician for help Caution Any changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Texas Instruments may void your authority to operate the equipment 2005 Texas Instruments Incorporated Windows and Macintosh are trademarks of their respective owners ...

Страница 4: ...e battery compartment Arrange the batteries according to the polarity and diagram in the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery cover on the calculator The cover should snap into place Turning on your Turning on your Turning on your Turning on your Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 for the first time for the first time for the first time for the first time After installing the batteri...

Страница 5: ... Apps appear on the Apps desktop as icons organized in categories for easy access From the Apps desktop you can Open Apps Select and edit categories of Apps View all of the Apps installed on your calculator View the full name of the highlighted App View and edit the time and date Check status line information View split screen mode information To lighten the display press and hold 8 and tap To dar...

Страница 6: ... Ð Edit categories To return to the Apps desktop at any time press O The last category selected appears with the last open App highlighted Removing and replacing the cover Voyage 200 Removing and replacing the cover Voyage 200 Removing and replacing the cover Voyage 200 Removing and replacing the cover Voyage 200 To remove the cover 1 Hold the unit with one hand 2 Grasp the cover by the lip with t...

Страница 7: ...e cover position it over the calculator with the lip in front and snap in place Stowing the cover Stowing the cover Stowing the cover Stowing the cover To stow the cover position it upside down beneath the calculator with the lip in front and snap in place Lip ...

Страница 8: ... If you turned off the Apps desktop the calculator Home screen appears You can use either of the following keys to turn off the Voyage 200 Press Description 2 press 2 and then press Settings and memory contents are retained by the Constant Memory feature You cannot however use 2 if an error message is displayed When you turn the Voyage 200 on again it displays either the Home screen or the Apps de...

Страница 9: ...d any error conditions are exactly the same as before APD All settings and memory contents are retained Note APD does not occur if a calculation or program is in progress unless the program is paused If a program is running but waiting for a key press APD will occur after several minutes of inactivity press and then press Similar to 2 except You can use if an error message is displayed When you tu...

Страница 10: ...Getting Started 10 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 keys keys keys keys Voyage 200 keys Ê Function keys ƒ Š open toolbar menus access Apps and edit categories of Apps Ê Ë Î Í Ì ...

Страница 11: ...h these differences To type a single uppercase alphabetic character press 7 and the letter key To turn on uppercase lock press 2 To turn off uppercase lock press 2 again Entering special characters Entering special characters Entering special characters Entering special characters Use the CHAR Character menu and key commands to enter special characters The CHAR menu lets you access Greek math inte...

Страница 12: ...r keys to select a category A submenu lists the characters in that category 3 Use the cursor keys to select a character and press Example Enter the right arrow symbol in the Text Editor Press Result 2 G 4 Scroll down for more characters ...

Страница 13: ... characters press 8 and the corresponding key Press N to close the map Example Use the keyboard map to find the quotation symbol shortcut and enter the symbol in the Program Editor 9 or Press D repeatedly to select 9 and press Press Result 8 Press Result Symbol displayed at cursor location ...

Страница 14: ...escription 2 Second Accesses Apps menu options and other operations Second functions are printed above their corresponding keys in the same color as the 2 key 8 Diamond Accesses Apps menu options and other operations Diamond functions are printed above their corresponding keys in the same color as the 8 key Shift Types an uppercase character for the next letter key you press Also used with A and B...

Страница 15: ...eys to perform the following operations On the Apps desktop open Apps and select or edit Apps categories On the calculator Home screen open toolbar menus to select math related operations Within Apps open toolbar menus to select App options 1 Hand Lets you use the cursor keys to manipulate geometric objects Also used when drawing on a graph Press Result 2 Keys Description ...

Страница 16: ... bottom of a page C and A C and B D and A or D and B moves the cursor diagonally Press each pair of indicated cursor keys simultaneously Numeric keypad Numeric keypad Numeric keypad Numeric keypad The numeric keypad lets you enter positive and negative numbers To enter a negative number press before typing the number Note Don t confuse the negation key with the subtraction key To enter a number in...

Страница 17: ... notation Other important keys Other important keys Other important keys Other important keys Press Result 6 8 5 2 3 Key Command Description 8 Displays the Y Editor 8 Displays the Window Editor 8 Displays the Graph screen 8 Sets parameters for the Table screen 8 Displays the Table screen ...

Страница 18: ... on the screen is saved 8 N Creates new file 8 O Opens an existing file you specify 8 F Displays the FORMATS or GRAPH FORMATS dialog box where you enter format information for the active App O Displays the Apps desktop 8 O With the Apps desktop off displays the FLASH APPLICATIONS menu 2 a Switches between the last two chosen Apps 2 Turns the custom menu on and off 2 4 Converts measurement units 2 ...

Страница 19: ...s a list of commands 2 Recalls the contents of a variable Stores a value to a variable 2 G Displays the CHAR menu which lets you select Greek letters international accented characters and other special characters 2 K In full screen mode displays the Apps desktop In split screen mode displays the full screen view of the active App With the Apps desktop off displays the calculator Home screen Key Co...

Страница 20: ...ature retains all of the mode settings you have selected To view the Voyage 200 mode settings 1 Press 3 Page 1 of the MODE dialog box appears 2 Press or to display the modes listed on Page 2 or Page 3 Note Modes that are grayed out are available only if other required mode settings are selected For example the Custom Units mode listed on Page 3 is available only if the Unit System mode is set to C...

Страница 21: ...Getting Started 21 Changing mode settings Changing mode settings Changing mode settings Changing mode settings Example Change the Language mode setting to Spanish Español ã Press Result 3 Press Result ...

Страница 22: ...Getting Started 22 Scroll down to the Language field D Press B and then press D until 3 Español is highlighted Note Your menu list might vary depending on the languages installed Press Result ...

Страница 23: ...tions instructions and user defined programs Commands are listed alphabetically Commands not beginning with a letter are found at the end of the list etc The Catalog Help App includes details about each command Options not currently valid are grayed out For example the Flash Apps menu option is grayed out if no Flash applications are installed on your Voyage 200 the User Defined menu option is gra...

Страница 24: ... same letter Select commands from the Catalog and insert them onto the calculator Home screen entry line or paste them to other Apps such as the Y Editor Text Editor or CellSheet Apps Press Result 2 E displays Built in commands displays Flash Apps commands if any displays User Defined commands if any ...

Страница 25: ...e command to appear Pressing 2 D advances the Catalog list one page at a time The status line displays any required and optional parameters for the selected command Optional parameters appear in square brackets Note Pressing ƒ will also display the parameters for the selected command Press Result 2 E C 2 D Then press D until the pointer is at the comDenom function ...

Страница 26: ... calculator Home screen is the starting point for math operations including executing instructions evaluating expressions and viewing results To display the calculator Home screen press You can also display the calculator Home screen from the Apps desktop by highlighting the Home icon and pressing Selected command Command parameters Brackets indicate optional parameters ...

Страница 27: ...d so on to display menus Ì Result of last entry is displayed here Note that results are not displayed on the entry line Í Status line shows the current state of the calculator Î Entry line displays your current entry Ï Your previous entry is displayed here To return to the Apps desktop from the calculator Home screen press O Ê Ë Ï Î Í Ì ...

Страница 28: ...the Calculator chapter The cursor which normally rests on the entry line can be moved into the history area The following table shows you how to move the cursor around in the history area To Do this View entries answers scrolled off the screen From the entry line press C to highlight the last answer Continue using C to move the cursor from answer to entry through the history area Go to the oldest ...

Страница 29: ...Modifying the history area Modifying the history area Modifying the history area Modifying the history area To change the number of pairs that can be saved 1 From the calculator Home screen press ƒ and select 9 Format 2 Press B and use C or D to highlight the new number 3 Press To clear the history area and delete all saved pairs From the calculator Home screen press ƒ and select 8 Clear Home or T...

Страница 30: ...truncated use the cursor keys to highlight the icon Now view the full name at the top of the Apps desktop Opening Apps Opening Apps Opening Apps Opening Apps Use the cursor keys or press the first letter of the App name to highlight the Apps icon on the Apps desktop and press The App either opens directly or displays a dialog box The most common dialog box lists these options for the App Note The ...

Страница 31: ...any required information and press The App appears Example Create a new program using the Program Editor New Creates a new file with the name typed in the field Press Result Use cursor keys to highlight 3 D D p r o g r a m 1 Option Description ...

Страница 32: ...desktop with the icon for the last App opened highlighted You can also return to the Apps desktop by pressing 2 K in full screen mode In split screen mode press 2 K twice To return to the last open App from the Apps desktop press 2 a Selecting an Apps category Selecting an Apps category Selecting an Apps category Selecting an Apps category On the Voyage 200 the Apps category names appear along the...

Страница 33: ...ts to the category See Customizing the Apps categories on page 34 Key Description All Icons for all installed Apps displayed Not customizable English Customizable category English is the default SocialSt Customizable category SocialSt social studies is the default Math Customizable category Math is the default ˆ Graphing Customizable category Graphing is the default Science Customizable category S...

Страница 34: ...ries A submenu displays the six customizable Apps category names The All category is not listed 2 Highlight an Apps category and press The Edit Categories dialog box appears with a list of installed Apps and a text box with the category name highlighted 3 To change the Apps category name type the desired name Note Enter a name of up to eight characters including letters with or without capitalizat...

Страница 35: ...Getting Started 35 Example Replace the Social Studies category with the Business category and add the CellSheet and Finance App shortcuts Press Result ƒ B 2 or D B u s i n e s s ...

Страница 36: ...Getting Started 36 D B D B Press Result ...

Страница 37: ...it Screen mode from Page 2 of the MODE screen The Voyage 200 displays the selected Apps in the split screen view as shown Split the screen horizontally top bottom or vertically left right To return to the Apps desktop press O The split screen status appears at the top of the Apps desktop with the names of the open Apps and the portions of the screen in which each is displayed The highlighted numer...

Страница 38: ...Checking status information Checking status information Checking status information Checking status information Look to the status line located at the bottom of the screen for information about the current state of your Voyage 200 Split screen status highlight indicates the portion where the next App selected will open Names of open Apps ...

Страница 39: ...de in which answers are calculated and displayed AUTO EXACT APPROX Ï Graph number Active of two independent graphs in split screen mode GR 1 GR 2 Ð Graph mode Selected type of graph that can be plotted FUNC PAR POL SEQ 3D DE Ñ Entry Answer pairs 22 30 Number of entry answer pairs default is 30 maximum is 99 in the history area of the calculator Home screen Ò Replace batteries Displayed when batter...

Страница 40: ...m the MODE dialog box If you do open Apps from the APPLICATIONS menu To open the APPLICATIONS menu press O Example Turn off the Apps desktop Ó Busy Pause Locked Archived variable BUSY Calculation or graph is in progress PAUSE You paused a graph or program Œ Variable opened in the current editor is locked or archived and cannot be modified Press Result 3 Indicator Meaning ...

Страница 41: ...he clock Using the clock Using the clock Using the clock Use the CLOCK dialog box to set the time and date select the clock display format and turn the clock off and on The clock is turned on by default If you turn off the clock all Clock dialog box options except Clock ON OFF are grayed out D D B C Note The previous open App appears in this example the calculator Home screen Press Result ...

Страница 42: ... CLOCK dialog box displays the settings current at the time you open the dialog box you might need to update the time before exiting Setting the time Setting the time Setting the time Setting the time 1 Press B to open the list of time formats 2 Press C or D to highlight an option then press The selected format appears in the Time Format field 3 Press D to highlight the Hour field 4 Type the hour ...

Страница 43: ...d in the top right corner of the Apps desktop Setting the date Setting the date Setting the date Setting the date 1 Press C or D as required to highlight the Date Format field 2 Press B to open the list of date formats 3 Press C or D to highlight an option then press The selected format appears in the Date Format field 4 Press D to highlight the Year field 5 Type the year then press D to highlight...

Страница 44: ...hen press to save your settings and exit The date is updated in the top right corner of the Apps desktop Example Set the time and date to 19 10 02 October 19 2002 at 1 30 p m Press Result Use cursor keys to highlight D 1 D Time and date ...

Страница 45: ...Getting Started 45 3 0 D B D D B D Press Result ...

Страница 46: ...Getting Started 46 D 2 0 0 2 D B Scroll down to October and press Press Result ...

Страница 47: ...d 47 Turning off the clock Turning off the clock Turning off the clock Turning off the clock From the Apps desktop open the CLOCK dialog box and select OFF in the Clock field D 1 9 Press Result Revised time and date ...

Страница 48: ...Getting Started 48 Example Turn off the clock Press Result Use cursor keys to highlight Scroll down to the Clock field B C Clock on ...

Страница 49: ...g to the toolbars at the top of the calculator Home screen and most App screens Select other menus using key commands Toolbar menus Toolbar menus Toolbar menus Toolbar menus The starting point for Voyage 200 math operations the calculator Home screen displays toolbar menus that let you choose math related options Toolbar menus also appear at the top of most App screens These menus list common func...

Страница 50: ...ess C to select the last option on the menu If the last menu option is selected press D to select the first option on the menu Press To display 2 G CHAR menu Lists characters not available on the keyboard characters are organized by category Greek math punctuation special and international 2 I MATH menu Lists math operations by category O APPLICATIONS menu Lists the installed Apps Menu is availabl...

Страница 51: ...1 Example Select factor from the Algebra menu on the calculator Home screen Press Result Press or From the Apps desktop use the cursor keys to highlight and press 2 or D 6 indicates Algebra menu will open when you press ...

Страница 52: ...electing submenu options Selecting submenu options A small arrow symbol ú to the right of a menu option indicates that selecting the option will open a submenu Example Select ord from the MATH menu on the calculator Home screen Press Result 2 I points to additional options ...

Страница 53: ...dialog boxes Using dialog boxes Using dialog boxes Using dialog boxes An ellipsis at the end of a menu option indicates that choosing the option will open a dialog box Select the option and press D or C C B B or C Press Result ...

Страница 54: ...ow Editor Note Pressing the 8 S key shortcut also opens the SAVE COPY AS dialog box in most Apps Press Result O Use the cursor keys to highlight and press ƒ 2 or D Press B to display a list of folders Type the name of the variable Press twice to save and close the dialog box ...

Страница 55: ...you press B when a menu option with a submenu is selected the submenu will appear instead of the next toolbar menu Press B again to move to the next menu More information is available about menus See the electronic Operating the Calculator chapter Custom menu Custom menu Custom menu Custom menu The custom menu provides quick access to your most commonly used options Use the default custom menu or ...

Страница 56: ...Getting Started 56 Example Turn on and turn off the custom menu from the calculator Home screen Example Restore the default custom menu Press Result 2 F 2 F Default custom menu Normal toolbar menu ...

Страница 57: ...ult custom menu erases the previous custom menu If you created the previous custom menu with a program you can run the program again to reuse the menu Press Result 2 F to turn off the custom menu and turn on the standard toolbar menu ˆ 3 or D D ...

Страница 58: ... the Apps desktop use the APPLICATIONS menu to open Apps To open the APPLICATIONS menu with the Apps desktop off press O Note If you press O with the Apps desktop turned on the Apps desktop will appear instead of the APPLICATIONS menu Example With the Apps desktop turned off open the Window Editor from the APPLICATIONS menu To access Apps not listed on the APPLICATIONS menu select 1 FlashApps Pres...

Страница 59: ...etting split screen mode You can split the screen either top to bottom or left to right from the MODE dialog box The split screen setting stays in effect until you change it 1 Press 3 to display the MODE dialog box 2 Press to display the Split Screen mode setting 3 Press B to open the Split Screen mode menu 4 Press D as required to highlight either TOP BOTTOM or LEFT RIGHT 5 Press The Split Screen...

Страница 60: ...Getting Started 60 B D Press Result ...

Страница 61: ...ress B to display a menu of available Apps See Setting split screen mode on page 59 2 Press D or C to highlight the App and press 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Split 2 App mode setting Mode Description Split 2 App Lets you specify the App displayed in the bottom or right portion of the split screen Works together with Split 1 App which lets you specify the App displayed in the top or left portion...

Страница 62: ...Getting Started 62 Example Display the Y Editor in the top screen and the Graph App in the bottom screen Press Result D B 2 D B 4 ...

Страница 63: ...he active App Selecting the active App In split screen mode only one App can be active at a time To switch between active Apps press 2 a To open a third App press O and select the App This App replaces the active split screen App Exiting split screen mode Exiting split screen mode Exiting split screen mode Exiting split screen mode Exit split screen mode in any of the following ways Press 2 K to c...

Страница 64: ...S versions Managing Apps and operating system OS versions Managing Apps and operating system OS versions Using the Voyage 200 connectivity features you can download Apps from The TI Educational Productivity Solutions E PS Web site at education ti com latest The CD ROM included with your Voyage 200 A compatible graphing calculator Adding Apps to your Voyage 200 is like loading software on a compute...

Страница 65: ...ion about your Voyage 200 You will find this information on the ABOUT screen To display the ABOUT screen press ƒ 3 About from the Apps desktop The ABOUT screen displays the following information about your Voyage 200 Ê OS version Ë Hardware version Ì Unit ID required to obtain certificates for installing purchased Apps Similar to a serial number Write this number down and keep it in a safe place i...

Страница 66: ...you want to delete by pressing Press again to deselect 5 Press ƒ 1 Delete The VAR LINK delete confirmation dialog box displays 6 Press to delete the application Note Only Flash Apps can be deleted Connecting your Connecting your Connecting your Connecting your Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 to other devices to other devices to other devices to other devices The Voyage 200 includes a s...

Страница 67: ... Voyage 200 The TI Presenter video adapter provides a video interface between the calculator and video display or recording devices Or use the accessory port to connect the TI ViewScreen overhead panel to your calculator The TI ViewScreen overhead panel enlarges and projects the display so an entire class can view it For more information about the TI Presenter video adapter and TI ViewScreen panel...

Страница 68: ...ou accidentally interrupt the transfer before it is complete you will need to reinstall the OS via a computer Again remember to install new batteries before downloading Please contact Texas Instruments as described in Service Support Information if you experience a problem Battery Precautions Battery Precautions Battery Precautions Battery Precautions Take these precautions when replacing batterie...

Страница 69: ...to place Replacing the AAA alkaline batteries Replacing the AAA alkaline batteries Replacing the AAA alkaline batteries Replacing the AAA alkaline batteries As the batteries lose power the display begins to dim especially during calculations If you find yourself increasing the contrast frequently replace the AAA alkaline batteries The status line also gives battery information Before replacing the...

Страница 70: ...ures of the Voyage 200 The history area in each screen was cleared by pressing ƒ and selecting 8 Clear Home before performing each example to illustrate only the results of the example s keystrokes Showing Computations Showing Computations Showing Computations Showing Computations Steps and keystrokes Display Compute sin p 4 and display the result in symbolic and numeric format To clear the histor...

Страница 71: ...Complex Numbers Expanding Complex Numbers Steps and keystrokes Display Compute the factorial of several numbers to see how the Voyage 200 handles very large integers To get the factorial operator press 2 I select 7 Probability and then select 1 Press 5 2 Å 20 2 Å 30 2 Å Steps and keystrokes Display Compute 3 5i 3 to see how the Voyage 200 handles computations involving complex numbers Press c 3 5 ...

Страница 72: ...ter factor on the entry line by typing FACTOR on the keyboard or by pressing and selecting 2 factor Press 2 2634492 d Optional Enter other numbers on your own Steps and keystrokes Display Find the root of the expression x y You can enter root on the entry line by typing ROOT on the keyboard or by pressing 8 9 This example illustrates using the root function and how the expression is displayed in p...

Страница 73: ...pression xN5 3 You can enter expand on the entry line by typing EXPAND on the keyboard or by pressing and selecting 3 expand Press 3 c X 5 d Z 3 d Optional Enter other expressions on your own Steps and keystrokes Display Reduce the expression x2 N2xN5 xN1 to its simplest form You can enter propFrac on the entry line by typing PROPFRAC on the keyboard or by pressing and selecting 7 propFrac Press 7...

Страница 74: ...r factor on the entry line by typing FACTOR on the keyboard or by pressing and selecting 2 factor Press 2 X Z 2 5 b X d Steps and keystrokes Display Solve the equation x2 N2xN6 2 with respect to x You can enter solve on the entry line by selecting solve from the Catalog menu by typing SOLVE on the keyboard or by pressing and selecting 1 solve The status line area shows the required syntax for the ...

Страница 75: ...int Solving Inequalities Solving Inequalities Solving Inequalities Solving Inequalities Steps and keystrokes Display Solve the equation x2 N2xN6 2 with respect to x where x is greater than zero The with I operator provides domain constraint Press 1 X Z 2 2 X 6 Á 2 b X d 2 Í X 2 Ã 0 Steps and keystrokes Display Solve the inequality x2 1 x with respect to x Press 1 X Z 2 2 Ã 1 b Xd ...

Страница 76: ...play Find the derivative of xNy 3 x y 2 with respect to x This example illustrates using the calculus differentiation function and how the function is displayed in pretty print in the history area Press 2 c X Y d Z 3 e c X Y d Z 2 b X d Steps and keystrokes Display Compute implicit derivatives for equations in two variables in which one variable is defined implicitly in terms of another This examp...

Страница 77: ...n x with respect to x This example illustrates using the calculus integration function Press 2 X p W X d b X d Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Input a row or column of vectors Press 2 g 6 b 0 b 0 2 h d 2 g 4 b 0 b 2 2 h a 2 g 1 b 2 b 1 2 h b 2 g 7 b 6 b 5 2 h c 2 Solve x a y b z c d x y z Press 1 X p a y p b z p c Á d b 2 X b Y b Z 2 d ...

Страница 78: ...n the entry line by typing LOG on the keyboard or by pressing 8 7 Press 8 7 X b d Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box For Angle mode select DEGREE Convert 345 degrees to Gradian angle measure You can enter úGrad on the entry line by selecting úGrad from the Catalog menu or from the Math menu by pressing 2 I and selecting 2 angle A úGrad Press 3 D D D B 2 345 2 v 2 I 2 A ...

Страница 79: ...so that x is expressed in terms of y Substitute the expression for x into the second 2 Convert 345 degrees to Radian angle measure You can enter úRad on the entry line by selecting úRad from the Catalog menu or from the Math menu by pressing 2 I and selecting 2 angle B úRad Note You can also use ó ô or G to override the angle mode setting temporarily Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 80: ...an also type solve directly from the keyboard or select it from the Catalog Press 8 M M 1 2 X 3 Y Á 4 b X d 2 Begin to solve the equation Lx 7y L12 for y but do not press yet Press 1 X 7 Y Á 12 b Y d 3 Use the with operator to substitute the expression for x that was calculated from the first equation This gives the value of y The with operator is displayed as on the screen Use the auto paste feat...

Страница 81: ... and Measurement Units Using the equation f m a calculate the force when m 5 kilograms and a 20 meters second2 What is the force when a 9 8 meters second2 This is the 4 Highlight the equation for x in the history area Press C C C 5 Auto paste the highlighted expression to the entry line Then substitute the value of y that was calculated from the second equation Press 2 Í C The solution is x L8 11 ...

Страница 82: ...amed _g Convert the result from newtons to kilograms of force Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box Page 3 For Unit System mode select SI for the metric system of measurements Results are displayed according to these default units Press 3 B 1 ...

Страница 83: ...d 2 C to scroll one page at a time through the categories If you use the UNITS dialog box to select a unit the _ is entered automatically Now instead of re entering _m _s2 each time you need it you can use _ms2 Also you can now use the UNITS dialog box to select _ms2 from the Acceleration category Press 8 À D B M e 8 À D D D D B S Z 2 9 2 5 MS2 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 84: ...ess 5 2 5 KG p 20 2 5 MS2 4 Using the same m calculate the force for an acceleration due to gravity the constant _g For _g you can use the pre defined constant available from the UNITS dialog box or you can type _g Press 5 2 5 KG p 8 À B G 5 Convert to kilograms of force _kgf 2 4 displays the 4 conversion operator Press B 2 4 2 5 KGF Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 85: ...ng the Y Editor You will learn how to enter a function produce a graph of the function trace a curve find a minimum point and transfer the minimum coordinates to the Home screen Explore the graphing capabilities of the Voyage 200 by graphing the function y x2 N3 N10 2 Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the Y Editor Press 8 2 Enter the function abs x2 N3 N10 2 The screen shot shows the pretty p...

Страница 86: ...Trace The tracing cursor and the x and y coordinates are displayed Press 5 Open the MATH menu and select 3 Minimum Press D D 6 Set the lower bound Press B right cursor to move the tracing cursor until the lower bound for x is just to the left of the minimum node before pressing the second time Press B B Steps and keystrokes Display tracing cursor ...

Страница 87: ...pper bound for x is just to the right of the minimum node Press B B 8 Find the minimum point on the graph between the lower and upper bounds Press 9 Transfer the result to the Home screen and then display the Home screen Press 8 H 8 Steps and keystrokes Display minimum point minimum coordinates ...

Страница 88: ...w ZoomStd Then use ZoomSqr to adjust the viewing window Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box For Graph mode select FUNCTION Press 3 B 1 2 Display the Home screen Then store the radius 5 in variable r Press 8 5 9 R 3 Display and clear the Y Editor Then define y1 x the top half of a circle In function graphing you must define separate functions for the top and bottom halves of ...

Страница 89: ...name y1 x not simply y1 Press Y 1 c X d 5 Select the ZoomStd viewing window which automatically graphs the functions In the standard viewing window both the x and y axes range from L10 to 10 However this range is spread over a longer distance along the x axis than the y axis Therefore the circle appears as an ellipse Press 6 6 Select ZoomSqr ZoomSqr increases the range along the x axis so that cir...

Страница 90: ...to eliminate faux asymptotes and connections in a jump discontinuity Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box For Graph mode select FUNCTION For Angle mode select RADIAN Press 3 B 1 D D D B 1 2 Open the Y Editor and enter y1 x 1 x 1 Press 8 1 e c X 1 d 3 Display the Graph Formats dialog box and set Detect Discontinuities to OFF Note The second item on the Graph Format dialog is n...

Страница 91: ... Discontinuities to ON Note The second item on the Graph Format dialog is greyed out which means the graph order is set to sequential Seq Press 8 FD D D D D D B 2 6 Execute the Graph command which automatically displays the Graph screen No faux asymptotes are present on the graph Note Graphing speed may slow considerably when Detect Discontinuities is set to ON Press 8 q Steps and keystrokes Displ...

Страница 92: ...nd other drag forces what is the maximum height of the ball and when does it hit the ground Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box For Graph mode select PARAMETRIC Press 3 B 2 2 Display and clear the Y Editor Then define the horizontal component xt1 t v0t cos q Enter values for v0 and q Press 8 8 15T p X 60 2 d Type T p X not T X Enter a symbol by typing either 2 or 2 I 2 1 Thi...

Страница 93: ...riate for this example You can press either D or to enter a value and move to the next variable Press 8 0 D 3 D 02 D 2 D 25 D 5 D 2 D 10 D 5 5 Graph the parametric equations to model the path of the ball Press 8 6 Select Trace Then move the cursor along the path to find the y value at maximum height t value where the ball hits the ground Press B or A as necessary Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 94: ...r A 8 and B 2 5 Then explore the appearance of the rose for other values of A and B Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box For Graph mode select POLAR For Angle mode select RADIAN Press 3 B 3 D D D B 1 2 Display and clear the Y Editor Then define the polar equation r1 q A sin Bq Enter 8 and 2 5 for A and B respectively Press 8 8 8 W 2 5 Ï d ...

Страница 95: ...emaining petals have q values greater than 2p The rose does not appear symmetrical Both the x an y axes range from L10 to 10 However this range is spread over a longer distance along the x axis than the y axis Press 6 4 Display the Window Editor and change qmax to 4p 4p will be evaluated to a number when you leave the Window Editor Press 8 D 4 2 T Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 96: ...f trees in the forest at the end of each year Does it stabilize at a certain number 5 Select ZoomSqr which regraphs the equation ZoomSqr increases the range along the x axis so that the graph is shown in correct proportion Press 5 You can change values for A and B as necessary and regraph the equation Initially After 1 Year After 2 Years After 3 Years 4000 8 x 4000 1000 8 x 8 x 4000 1000 1000 8 x ...

Страница 97: ...ke the integer part of the result No fractional trees are harvested To access iPart you can use 2 I simply type it or select it from the CATALOG Press 8 8 2 I 1 4 8 U1 c N 1 d 1000 d 3 Define ui1 as the initial value that will be used as the first term Press 4000 4 Display the Window Editor Set the n and plot Window variables nmin 0 and nmax 50 evaluate the size of the forest over 50 years Press 8...

Страница 98: ...ss 8 7 Select Trace Move the cursor to trace year by year How many years nc does it take the number of trees yc to stabilize Trace begins at nc 0 nc is the number of years xc nc since n is plotted on the x axis yc u1 n the number of trees at year n Press B and A as necessary Steps and keystrokes Display By default sequences use the Square display style ...

Страница 99: ...h format styles Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box For Graph mode select 3D Press 3 B 5 2 Display and clear the Y Editor Then define the 3D equation z1 x y x3 y N y3 x 390 Notice that implied multiplication is used in the keystrokes Press 8 8 c X Z 3 Y Y Z 3 X d e 390 3 Change the graph format to display and label the axes Also set Style WIRE FRAME You can animate any graph...

Страница 100: ...hen you animate the graph the screen returns to normal view automatically Except for animation you can do the same things in normal and expanded view Press p press p to switch between expanded and normal view 5 Animate the graph by decreasing the eyef Window variable value D or C may affect eyeq and eyeψ but to a lesser extent than eyef To animate the graph continuously press and hold the cursor f...

Страница 101: ...the viewing orbit around the graph Press 0 zero not the letter O A A A 7 View the graph along the x axis the y axis and then the z axis Press X This graph has the same shape along the y axis and x axis Press Y Press Z 8 Return to the initial orientation Press 0 zero Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 102: ...e graph in different graph format styles Press F press F to switch from each style to the next HIDDEN SURFACE CONTOUR LEVELS may require extra time to calculate contours WIRE AND CONTOUR WIRE FRAME Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 103: ...aphing Differential Equation Graphing Differential Equation Graphing Differential Equation Graphing Graph the solution to the logistic 1st order differential equation y 001y 100Ny Start by drawing only the slope field Then enter initial conditions in the Y Editor and interactively from the Graph screen Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box For Graph mode select DIFF EQUATIONS ...

Страница 104: ...all Leave the initial condition yi1 blank Note With y1 selected the device will graph the y1 solution curve not the derivative y1 Press 8 8 001 Y1 p c 100 Y1 d 3 Display the GRAPH FORMATS dialog box Then set Axes ON Labels ON Solution Method RK and Fields SLPFLD Note To graph one differential equation Fields must be set to SLPFLD or FLDOFF If Fields DIRFLD an error occurs when you graph Press 8 F ...

Страница 105: ... only the slope field is drawn as specified by Fields SLPFLD in the GRAPH FORMATS dialog box Press 8 6 Return to the Y Editor and enter an initial condition yi1 10 Press 8 10 7 Return to the Graph screen Initial conditions entered in the Y Editor always occur at t0 The graph begins at the initial condition and plots to the right Then it plots to the left Press 8 Steps and keystrokes Display The in...

Страница 106: ...Previews 106 8 Return to the Y Editor and change yi1 to enter two initial conditions as a list yi1 10 20 Press 8 C 2 10 b 20 2 9 Return to the Graph screen Press 8 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 107: ...r t other than the t0 value entered in the Y Editor or Window Editor Instead of entering t and y1 after pressing Š you can move the cursor to a point on the screen and then press You can use to trace curves for initial conditions specified in the Y Editor However you cannot trace the curve for an initial condition selected interactively Press Š 40 45 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 108: ...splay the MODE dialog box For Graph mode select FUNCTION For Angle mode select RADIAN Press 3 B 1 D D D B 1 2 Display the Home screen Use the Graph command and the when function to specify the piecewise defined function 2 selects Graph from the Other toolbar menu and automatically adds a space Press 8 2 WHEN c X 2 Â 0 b X b 5 p X X d d 3 Execute the Graph command which automatically displays the G...

Страница 109: ...ct a different operation or press N Press 5 C until the line is positioned 5 Save a picture of the graph Use PIC1 as the variable name for the picture Be sure to set Type Picture By default it is set to GDB Press 2 B 2 D D PIC1 6 Clear the drawn horizontal line You can also press to regraph Press ˆ 1 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 110: ...and where do they occur 7 Open the saved picture variable to redisplay the graph with the line Be sure to set Type Picture By default it is set to GDB Press 1 B 2 if not already shown also set Variable pic1 Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box For the Graph mode select FUNCTION Press 3 B 1 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 111: ...able parameters to tblStart M10 tbl 1 Graph Table OFF Independent AUTO Press 8 10 D 1 D B 1 D B 1 4 Display the Table screen Press 8 5 Scroll through the table Notice that y1 changes sign at x M1 1 and 2 To scroll one page at a time use 2 D and 2 C Press D and C as necessary Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 112: ...coefficients change 6 Zoom in on the sign change between x L2 and x L1 by changing the table parameters to tblStart L2 tbl 1 Press 2 D 1 Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box For Graph select FUNCTION For Split Screen select LEFT RIGHT For Split 1 App select Y Editor For Split 2 App select Graph Press 3 B 1 B 3 D B 2 D B 4 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 113: ...the way across the display Press 8 5 1 X Z 3 2 X 6 3 Select the ZoomStd viewing window which switches to the Graph screen and graphs the function The thick border is now around the Graph screen Press 6 4 Switch to the Y Editor and edit y1 x to change 1x3 to 5x3 2 a is the second function of O The thick border is around the Y Editor Press 2 a C A B B 0 5 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 114: ... the edited function The thick border is around the Graph screen Press 2 a 6 Switch to the Y Editor and open the Window Editor in its place Press 2 a 8 7 Open the Home screen and then exit to a full sized Home screen Press Pr2 K Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 115: ...ly converted into a data variable which can have multiple columns Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Use O to display the Data Matrix Editor Create a new list variable named TEMP Press 3 B3 D D TEMP 2 Enter a column of numbers Then move the cursor up one cell just to see that a highlighted cell s value is shown on the entry line LIST is shown in the upper left corner to indicate a list variable You ca...

Страница 116: ...e the value of column 1 DATA is shown in the upper left corner to indicate that the list variable was converted to a data variable Press B 2 p C 1 4 Move to the column 2 header cell to show its definition in the entry line When the cursor is on the header cell you do not need to press to define it Simply begin typing the expression Press 2 C C 5 Clear the contents of the variable Simply clearing t...

Страница 117: ...2 stories Using Median Median and linear regression calculations find and plot equations to fit the data For each regression equation predict how many buildings of more than 12 stories you would expect in a city of 300 000 people Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box For Graph mode select FUNCTION Press 3 B 1 2 Use O to display the Data Matrix Editor Create a new data variable...

Страница 118: ...250 500 750 950 4 Move the cursor to row 1 in column 2 r1c2 Then enter the corresponding number of buildings 8 C moves the cursor to the top of the page After typing data for a cell you can press or D to enter the data and move the cursor down one cell Pressing C enters the data and moves the cursor up one cell Press B 2 C 4 31 42 9 20 55 73 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 119: ...me order as column 1 This is critical for maintaining the relationships between columns of data To sort column 1 the cursor can be anywhere in column 1 This example has you press 2 C so that you can see the first four rows Press A 2 C ˆ 4 6 Display the Calculate dialog box Set Calculation Type MedMed x C1 y C2 Store RegEQ to y1 x Press B 7 D C1 D C2 D B D Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 120: ... STAT VARS screen The Data Matrix Editor displays Press 9 Display the Calculate dialog box Set Calculation Type LinReg x C1 y C2 Store RegEQ to y2 x Press B 5 D D D B D 10 Perform the calculation to display the LinReg regression equation This equation is stored in y2 x Press 11 Close the STAT VARS screen The Data Matrix Editor displays Press Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 121: ...ngs Press 13 Define Plot 1 as Plot Type Scatter Mark Box x C1 y C2 Notice the similarities between this and the Calculate dialog box Press B 1 D B 1 D C1 D C2 14 Save the plot definition and return to the Plot Setup screen Notice the shorthand notation for Plot 1 s definition Press twice Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 122: ...lot 1 is selected Notice that y1 x and y2 x were selected when the regression equations were stored Press 8 ˆ 2 16 Scroll up to highlight Plot 1 The displayed shorthand definition is the same as on the Plot Setup screen Press C 17 Use ZoomData to graph Plot 1 and the regression equations y1 x and y2 x ZoomData examines the data for all selected stat plots and adjusts the viewing window to include ...

Страница 123: ...le the cursor must highlight the title cell at the very top of the column lets you define a header from anywhere in a column When the cursor is on a header cell pressing is not required Press B B C C MED Y1 c C1 d 20 Enter a title for column 4 Define column 4 s header as the residuals difference between observed and predicted values for MedMed Press B C RESID C2 C3 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 124: ... C LIN Y2 c C1 d 22 Enter a title for column 6 Define column 6 s header as the residuals for LinReg Press B C RESID C2 C5 23 Display the Plot Setup screen and deselect Plot 1 Press 24 Highlight Plot 2 and define it as Plot Type Scatter Mark Box x C1 y C4 MedMed residuals Press D D D C1 D C4 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 125: ... D C1 D C6 26 Display the Y Editor and turn all the y x functions off From select 3 Functions Off not 1 All Off Plots 2 and 3 are still selected Press 8 3 27 Use ZoomData to graph the residuals marks the MedMed residuals marks the LinReg residuals Press 9 28 Display the Home screen Press 8 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 126: ...nd LinReg y2 x regression equations to calculate values for x 300 300 000 population The round function 2 I 1 3 ensures that results show an integer number of buildings After calculating the first result edit the entry line to change y1 to y2 Press 2 I 1 3 Y1 c 300 d b 0 d B A eight times 0 2 Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Use Oto display the Program Editor Create a new program Press 3 Steps and k...

Страница 127: ...e of the new program variable Press D D PROG 1 3 Display the template for a new program The program name Prgm and EndPrgm are shown automatically After typing in an input box such as Variable you must press twice Press twice Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 128: ...numeric expression 0 temp Creates a variable named temp and initializes it to 0 For i 1 n 1 Starts a For loop based on variable i First time through the loop i 1 At end of loop i is incremented by 1 Loop continues until i n temp i temp Adds current value of i to temp EndFor Marks the end of the For loop Disp temp Displays the final value of temp Type the program lines as shown Press at the end of ...

Страница 129: ...n the displayed dialog box Press 5 7 Continue with the program The Disp command displays the result on the Program I O screen The result is the sum of the integers from 1 through 5 Although the Program I O screen looks similar to the Home screen it is for program input and output only You cannot perform calculations on the Program I O screen Press twice Steps and keystrokes Display prog1 Output fr...

Страница 130: ...he Program I O screen and return to the Home screen You can also press N 2 K or 8 to return to the Home screen Press Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Start a new session of the Text Editor Press 3 2 Create a text variable called TEST which will automatically store any text you enter in the new session Use the MAIN folder shown as the default on the NEW dialog box After typing in an input box such as...

Страница 131: ...or right of the cursor respectively Type anything you want 4 Leave the Text Editor and display the Home screen Your text session was stored automatically as you typed Therefore you do not need to save the session manually before exiting the Text Editor Press 8 5 Return to the current session on the Text Editor Notice that the displayed session is exactly the same as you left it Press 2 a Steps and...

Страница 132: ...isplay the Numeric Solver 2 Enter the equation When you press or D the screen lists the variables used in the equation Press A Á c M2 M1 d e c M2 M1 d p G 3 Enter values for each variable except the unknown variable m1 Define m2 and g first Then define a You must define g before you can define a in terms of g Accept the default for bound If a variable has been defined previously its value is shown...

Страница 133: ...known variable To check the solution s accuracy the left and right sides of the equation are evaluated separately The difference is shown as left rt If the solution is precise left rt 0 Press 0 marks the calculated values 6 Graph the solution using a ZoomStd viewing window The graph is displayed in a split screen You can explore the graph by tracing zooming etc The variable marked by the cursor un...

Страница 134: ...isplayed results 7 Return to the Numeric Solver and exit the split screen You can press or D to redisplay the list of variables Press 2 a 2 Steps and keystrokes Display 1 Display the MODE dialog box Page 2 For Base mode select DEC as the default number base Integer results are displayed according to the Base mode Fractional and floating point results are always displayed in decimal form Press 3 us...

Страница 135: ...h prefix is a zero not the letter O followed by B or H Press 0 B 10 0 HF 10 3 Add 1 to the result and convert it to binary 2 4 displays the 4 conversion operator Press 1 2 4 BIN 4 Add 1 to the result and convert it to hexadecimal Press 1 2 4 HEX 5 Add 1 to the result and leave it in the default decimal base Results use the 0b or 0h prefix to identify the base Press 1 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 136: ...e a variable to the user data archive memory and explore the ways in which you can and cannot access an archived variable Archived 6 Change the Base mode to HEX When Base HEX or BIN the magnitude of a result is restricted to certain size limitations Press 3 use D to move to Base mode B 2 7 Calculate 0b10 0hF 10 Press 0 B 10 0 HF 10 8 Change the Base mode to BIN Press 3 use D to move to Base mode B...

Страница 137: ... variables with the following variable types Expression 5 x1 Function x2 4 f x List 5 10 L1 Matrix 30 25 m1 Press 8 M 5 9 X1 X Z 2 4 9 F c X d 2 5 b 10 2 9 L1 2 g 30 b 25 2 h 9 M1 2 Suppose you start to perform an operation using a function variable but can t remember its name Press 5 p 3 Display the VAR LINK screen This example assumes that the variables assigned above are the only ones defined P...

Страница 138: ... variables of all different types Press D D B 5 5 Highlight the f function variable and view its contents Notice that the function was assigned using f x but is listed as f on the screen Press D ˆ 6 Close the Contents window Press N 7 With the f variable still highlighted close VAR LINK to paste the contents of the variable to the entry line Notice that is pasted Press Steps and keystrokes Display...

Страница 139: ...Previews 139 8 Complete the operation Press 2 d Steps and keystrokes Display 5 f 2 ...

Страница 140: ... highlight the variable you want to archive The previous change in view is no longer in effect The screen lists all defined variables Press 2 use D to highlight x1 2 Use the Manage toolbar menu to archive the variable û indicates the variable is archived Press 8 3 Return to the Home screen and use the archived variable in a calculation Press 8 6 p X1 ...

Страница 141: ...archived variable Press 10 9 X1 5 Cancel the error message Press N 6 Use VAR LINK to unarchive the variable Press 2 use D to highlight x1 9 7 Return to the Home screen and store a different value to the unarchived variable Press 8 Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 142: ...all variables A Ÿ mark indicates items that are selected Notice that this also selected the MAIN folder Note Instead of using if you don t want to delete all your variables you can select individual variables Highlight each variable to delete and press Press 1 2 Use to delete Note You can press 0 instead of 1 to delete the marked variables Press 1 3 Confirm the deletion Press ...

Страница 143: ...der Acknowledge the message When VAR LINK is redisplayed the deleted variables are not listed Press 5 Close VAR LINK and return to the current application Home screen in this example When you use N instead of to close VAR LINK the highlighted name is not pasted to the entry line Press N Steps and keystrokes Display ...

Страница 144: ...d off manually by using the and 2 or 8 keys To prolong battery life the APD Automatic Power Down feature lets the calculator turn itself off automatically Turning the Calculator On Turning the Calculator On Turning the Calculator On Turning the Calculator On Press If you turned the unit off by pressing 2 the unit returns to either the Apps desktop or the Home screen If you turned the unit off by p...

Страница 145: ...lled APD When you press the calculator will be exactly as you left it The display cursor and any error conditions are exactly as you left them All settings and memory contents are retained Press Description 2 press 2 and then press Settings and memory contents are retained by the Constant Memory feature However You cannot use 2 if an error message is displayed When you turn the calculator on again...

Страница 146: ...ess viewing angle and the adjustment of the display contrast The contrast setting is retained in memory when the graphing calculator is turned off Adjusting the Display Contrast Adjusting the Display Contrast Adjusting the Display Contrast Adjusting the Display Contrast You can adjust the display contrast to suit your viewing angle and lighting conditions Contrast keys If you press and hold 8 or 8...

Страница 147: ...lay may be very dark after you change batteries Use 8 to lighten the display The status line along the bottom of the display also gives battery information The Voyage 200 Keyboard The Voyage 200 Keyboard The Voyage 200 Keyboard The Voyage 200 Keyboard With its easy to hold shape and keyboard layout you can quickly access any area of the keyboard even when you are holding the unit with two hands Th...

Страница 148: ... Numeric keypad performs math and scientific functions Moving the Cursor Moving the Cursor Moving the Cursor Moving the Cursor To move the cursor in a particular direction press the appropriate cursor key A B C or D Some applications also let you press 2 A or 2 B to move to the beginning or end of a line 2 C or 2 D to move up or down one screen at a time 8 C or 8 D to move to the top or bottom of ...

Страница 149: ...eral keys that can perform three operations depending on whether you first press 2 or 8 Modifier Description 2 second Accesses the second function of the next key you press On the keyboard these are printed in the same color as the 2 key 8 diamond Activates keys that select certain applications menu items and other operations from the keyboard On the keyboard these are printed in the same color as...

Страница 150: ... display If you press a modifier by accident press it again or press N to cancel its effect Other Important Keys You Need to Be Familiar With Other Important Keys You Need to Be Familiar With Other Important Keys You Need to Be Familiar With Other Important Keys You Need to Be Familiar With Key Description 8 Displays the Y Editor 8 Displays the Window Editor 8 Displays the Graph screen 8 Sets para...

Страница 151: ...nt unit 0 Deletes the character to the left of the cursor backspaces 2 Toggles between insert and overtype mode for entering information 8 Deletes the character to the right of the cursor H 2 Í Enters the with operator which is used in symbolic calculations 2 2 Performs integrations and derivatives 2 Designates an angle in polar cylindrical and spherical coordinates 2 I Displays the MATH menu 2 Di...

Страница 152: ...age 200 Typing Alphabetic Characters on the Voyage 200 Typing Alphabetic Characters on the Voyage 200 2 Recalls the contents of a variable H 8 À Displays the UNITS dialog box 2 Displays the CHAR menu which lets you select Greek letters international accented characters etc 2 2 Recalls the previous entry and the last answer respectively To Press Type a single lowercase alpha character the letter ke...

Страница 153: ...s you enter positive and negative numbers for your calculations You can also enter numbers in scientific notation Entering a Negative Number Entering a Negative Number Entering a Negative Number Entering a Negative Number 1 Press the negation key Do not use the subtraction key 2 Type the number To see how your graphing calculator evaluates a negation in relation to other functions refer to the Equ...

Страница 154: ...preted as 6 M2 implied multiplication 2 4 2 but 2 4 subtracts 2 from the previous answer and then adds 4 Important Use for subtraction and use for negation Entering a Number in Scientific Notation Entering a Number in Scientific Notation Entering a Number in Scientific Notation Entering a Number in Scientific Notation 1 Type the part of the number that precedes the exponent This value can be an ex...

Страница 155: ...ation Entering Expressions and Instructions Entering Expressions and Instructions Entering Expressions and Instructions Entering Expressions and Instructions You perform a calculation by evaluating an expression You initiate an action by executing the appropriate instruction Expressions are calculated and results are displayed according to the mode settings The display format is determined by the ...

Страница 156: ...here you are required to enter a value you can enter an expression Operator Performs an operation such as ù Operators require an argument before and after the operator For example 4 5 and 5 2 Function Returns a value Functions require one or more arguments enclosed in parentheses after the function For example 5 and min 5 8 Instruction Initiates an action Instructions cannot be used in expressions...

Страница 157: ...evaluated according to the Equation Operating System EOS hierarchy described in the Technical Reference module To change the order of evaluation or just to ensure that an expression is evaluated in the order you require use parentheses Calculations inside a pair of parentheses are completed first For example in 4 1 2 EOS first evaluates 1 2 and then multiplies the answer by 4 If you enter The calc...

Страница 158: ... the entry line you can Press its key if available For example press W or Select it from a menu if available For example select 2 abs from the Number submenu of the MATH menu or Type the name letter by letter from the keyboard You can use any mixture of uppercase or lowercase letters For example type sin or Sin Example Example Example Example Calculate 3 76 M7 9 5 2 log 45 Type the function name i...

Страница 159: ...n also select log by using 2 Press Display 3 76 e c 7 9 2 5 d d 2 LOG c 45 d 3 76 M7 9 2 inserts because its argument must be in parentheses 3 76 M7 9 5 Use d once to close 5 and again to close M7 9 5 3 76 M7 9 5 2log 45 log requires around its argument ...

Страница 160: ...for One Line In the history area if both the entry and its answer cannot be displayed on one line the answer is displayed on the next line To view the entire entry or answer 1 Press C to move the cursor from the entry line up into the history area This highlights the last answer To enter more than one expression or instruction at a time separate them with a colon by pressing 2 Ë Ê Displays last re...

Страница 161: ...alculator leaves the expression on the entry line and highlights it You can continue to use the last answer or enter a new expression Example Example Example Example Calculate 3 76 M7 9 5 Then add 2 log 45 to the result 3 Use B and A or 2 B and 2 A to scroll right and left Note When you scroll to the right 7 is displayed at the beginning of the line If you press The calculator p e Z or Replaces th...

Страница 162: ...rmats of Displayed Results Formats of Displayed Results A result may be calculated and displayed in any of several formats This section describes the modes and their settings that affect the display formats You can check or change your current mode settings Press Display 3 76 e c 7 9 2 5 d d 2 LOG c 45 d There may be a delay before the Break message is displayed Press N to return to the current ap...

Страница 163: ...on The entry line does not show an expression in pretty print If pretty print is turned on the history area will show both the entry and its result in pretty print after you press Exact Approx Mode Exact Approx Mode Exact Approx Mode Exact Approx Mode By default Exact Approx AUTO You can use 3 to select from three settings Pretty Print ON OFF p2 p 2 p 2 x 3 2 Because AUTO is a combination of the o...

Страница 164: ...nd symbolic forms EXACT reduces rounding errors that could be introduced by intermediate results in chained calculations 2 Shows whole number results Shows simplified fractional results Shows symbolic p Shows symbolic form of roots that cannot be evaluated to a whole number Press 8 to temporarily override the EXACT setting and display a floating point result ...

Страница 165: ... be evaluated they are treated algebraically For example if the variable r is undefined pr2 3 14159 r2 AUTO Uses the EXACT form where possible but uses the APPROXIMATE form when your entry contains a decimal point Also certain functions may display APPROXIMATE results even if your entry does not contain a decimal point Fractional results are evaluated numerically Symbolic forms where possible are ...

Страница 166: ... Mode Display Digits Mode Display Digits Mode Display Digits Mode By default Display Digits FLOAT 6 which means that results are rounded to a maximum of six digits You can use 3 to select different settings The settings apply to all exponential formats Entry Exact Result Approximate Result Auto Result 8 4 2 2 2 8 6 4 3 1 33333 4 3 8 5ù3 51 2 25 5 25 5 A decimal in the entry forces a floating point...

Страница 167: ...played in the selected number of digits Exponential Format Mode Exponential Format Mode Exponential Format Mode Exponential Format Mode Setting Example Description FIX 0 12 123 123 5 123 46 123 457 FIX 0 FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 Results are rounded to the selected number of decimal places FLOAT 123 456789012 Number of decimal places varies depending on the result FLOAT 1 12 1 E 2 1 2E 2 123 123 5 123 46 ...

Страница 168: ...on in the Entry Line Editing an Expression in the Entry Line Editing an Expression in the Entry Line Knowing how to edit an entry can be a real time saver If you make an error while typing an expression it s often easier to correct the mistake than to retype the entire expression Setting Example Description NORMAL 12345 6 If a result cannot be displayed in the number of digits specified by the Dis...

Страница 169: ...g the Cursor Moving the Cursor Moving the Cursor Moving the Cursor After removing the highlight move the cursor to the applicable position within the expression Note If you accidentally press C instead of A or B the cursor moves up into the history area Press N or press D until the cursor returns to the entry line To remove the highlight move the cursor toward the side of the expression you want t...

Страница 170: ...or end of the entry line or M M if the cursor is not at the beginning or end of the entry line The first press deletes all characters to the right of the cursor and the second clears the entry line To delete Press The character to the left of the cursor 0 Hold 0 to delete multiple characters The character to the right of the cursor 8 0 All characters to the right of the cursor M once only If there...

Страница 171: ...type modes press 2 Note Look at the cursor to see if you re in insert or overtype mode Replacing or Deleting Multiple Characters Replacing or Deleting Multiple Characters Replacing or Deleting Multiple Characters Replacing or Deleting Multiple Characters First highlight the applicable characters Then replace or delete all the highlighted characters If in The next character you type Will be inserte...

Страница 172: ...n overview of how to select an item from any menu Specific menus 1 Move the cursor to either side of the characters you want to highlight 2 Hold and press A or B to highlight characters left or right of the cursor 1 Type the new characters 2 Press 0 Note When you highlight characters to replace remember that some function keys automatically add an open parenthesis To replace sin with cos place the...

Страница 173: ...gories of special characters Greek math etc 2 I MATH menu Lets you select from categories of math operations 2 CATALOG menu Lets you select from a complete alphabetic list of built in functions and instructions Also lets you select user defined functions or Flash application functions if any have been defined or loaded 2 CUSTOM menu Lets you access a menu that you can customize to list any availab...

Страница 174: ... item and then press Note that pressing C from the first item moves the highlight to the last item and vice versa Items Ending with Items Ending with Items Ending with Items Ending with 8 Submenus Submenus Submenus Submenus If you select a menu item ending with 8 a submenu is displayed You then select an item from the submenu 6 indicates that a menu will drop down from the toolbar when you press T...

Страница 175: ...item directly from the first menu item press C To wrap to the first menu item directly from the last menu item press D Items Containing Dialog Boxes Items Containing Dialog Boxes Items Containing Dialog Boxes Items Containing Dialog Boxes If you select a menu item containing ellipsis marks a dialog box is displayed for you to enter additional information indicates that you can use the cursor pad t...

Страница 176: ...other Moving from One Toolbar Menu to Another Moving from One Toolbar Menu to Another Moving from One Toolbar Menu to Another To move from one toolbar menu to another without making a selection either Press the key ƒ etc for the other toolbar menu or Use the cursor pad to move to the next press B or previous press A toolbar menu Pressing B from the last menu moves to the first menu and vice versa ...

Страница 177: ... MATH menu Selecting an Application Selecting an Application Selecting an Application Selecting an Application The graphing calculator has different applications that let you solve and explore a variety of problems You can select an application from a menu the Apps desktop or you can access commonly used applications directly from the keyboard 2 Press 1 to display the Number submenu Or press since...

Страница 178: ...ress or Press the number or letter for that application Application Lets you FlashApps Display a list of Flash applications if any Y Editor Define edit and select functions or equations for graphing Window Editor Set window dimensions for viewing a graph Graph Display graphs Table Display a table of variable values that correspond to an entered function Data Matrix Editor Enter and edit lists data...

Страница 179: ...ication either opens directly or displays a dialog box Your Apps desktop may vary from the one shown below The most common dialog box lists these options for the application Numeric Solver Enter an expression or equation define values for all but one variable and then solve for the unknown variable Home Enter expressions and instructions and perform calculations Option Description Current Returns ...

Страница 180: ...e Use any of these methods to return to the Apps desktop from within an application Press O In full screen mode press 2 K In split screen mode press 2 K to open the full screen view of the active application then press 2 K again To return to the last open application from the Apps desktop press 2 a New Creates a new file with the name typed in the field Option Description ...

Страница 181: ...Operating the Calculator 181 From the Keyboard From the Keyboard From the Keyboard From the Keyboard ...

Страница 182: ...ion used in second functions On the Voyage 200 some commonly used applications are listed above the QWERTY keys Note 2 key functions are not shown in the above graphic Application Press Home Y Editor 8 Window Editor 8 Graph 8 Table Setup 8 Table Screen 8 Applications listed above ƒ etc are printed in the same color as 8 Applications Diamond key ...

Страница 183: ...Settings Checking Mode Settings Checking Mode Settings Checking Mode Settings Press 3 to display the MODE dialog box which lists the modes and their current settings Ê There are three pages of mode listings Press ƒ or to quickly display a particular page Ë Indicates you can scroll down to see additional modes Ì indicates that you can press B or A to display and select from a menu Note Modes that a...

Страница 184: ...ettings The current setting is highlighted 3 Select the applicable setting Either Use D or C to highlight the setting and press or Press the number or letter for that setting Note To cancel a menu and return to the MODE dialog box without making a selection press N 4 Change other mode settings if necessary 5 When you finish all your changes press to save the changes and exit the dialog box Importa...

Страница 185: ...me Screen Display Digits Maximum number of digits FLOAT or fixed number of decimal places FIX displayed in a floating point result Regardless of the setting the total number of displayed digits in a floating point result cannot exceed 12 Angle Units in which angle values are interpreted and displayed RADIAN DEGREE or GRADIAN Exponential Format Notation used to display results NORMAL SCIENTIFIC or ...

Страница 186: ... sets of graphs Graph 2 If Number of Graphs 2 selects the type of graph in the Split 2 part of the screen Refer to Calculator Home Screen Split Screen Ratio Proportional sizes of the two parts of a split screen 1 1 1 2 or 2 1 Exact Approx Calculates expressions and displays results in numeric form or in rational symbolic form AUTO EXACT or APPROXIMATE Base Lets you perform calculations by entering...

Страница 187: ...y Clean Up Toolbar Menu Clean Up Toolbar Menu Clean Up Toolbar Menu Clean Up Toolbar Menu Language Lets you localize the calculator into one of several languages depending on which language Flash applications are installed Apps Desktop Turns the Apps desktop ON or OFF To display the Clean Up menu from the Home screen press ˆ Menu Item Description Clear a z Clears deletes all single character varia...

Страница 188: ...ect 1 Clear a z before beginning the calculation NewProb Places NewProb in the entry line You must then press to execute the command NewProb performs a variety of operations that let you begin a new problem from a cleared state without resetting the memory Clears all single character variable names in the current folder same as 1 Clear a z unless the variables are locked or archived Turns off all ...

Страница 189: ...ed in Flash applications or user defined functions if any have been loaded or defined Displaying the CATALOG Displaying the CATALOG Displaying the CATALOG Displaying the CATALOG To display the CATALOG dialog box press 2 The CATALOG defaults to Built in which displays an alphabetic list of all pre installed commands functions and instructions Ê Defaults to Built in Ë ƒ Help displays a command s par...

Страница 190: ...e is inserted in the entry line at the cursor location Therefore you should position the cursor as necessary before selecting the command 1 Press 2 2 Press Built in Note The first time you display the Built in list it starts at the top of the list The next time you display the list it starts at the same place you left it 3 Move the 8 indicator to the command and press Commands are listed in alphab...

Страница 191: ...out Parameters For the command indicated by 8 the status line shows the required and optional parameters if any and their type Ê Indicated command and its parameters Ë Brackets indicate optional parameters From the example above the syntax for factor is To the first function that begins with a specified letter The letter key factor expression or factor expression variable required optional To move...

Страница 192: ...meters If you select one of these commands parameters will not display on the status line and you will see Unavailable if you press ƒ Help Press N to exit the CATALOG Help dialog box Selecting a Flash Application Function Selecting a Flash Application Function Selecting a Flash Application Function Selecting a Flash Application Function A Flash application may contain one or more functions When yo...

Страница 193: ...eate functions see Creating and Evaluating User Defined Functions in Calculator Home Screen and Overview of Entering a Function in the Programming module See Programming for instructions on how to create and run a program The list is alphabetized by function name The left column lists functions The right column lists the Flash application that contains the function Information about a function is ...

Страница 194: ...the Memory and Variable Management module 3 Move the 8 indicator to the function or program and press The list is alphabetized by function program name The left column lists functions and programs The right column lists the folder that contains the function or program If the function or program s first line is a comment the comment text is displayed in the status line To exit without selecting a f...

Страница 195: ...ules for Variable Names A variable name Can use 1 to 8 characters consisting of letters and digits This includes Greek letters but not p accented letters and international letters Do not include spaces The first character cannot be a digit Can use uppercase or lowercase letters The names AB22 Ab22 aB22 and ab22 all refer to the same variable Cannot be the same as a name that is preassigned by the ...

Страница 196: ... Log Not OK name is preassigned to the log function Log1 OK 3rdTotal Not OK starts with a digit circumfer Not OK more than 8 characters DataTypes Examples Expressions 2 54 1 25E6 2p xmin 10 2 3i x 2 2 Lists 2 4 6 8 1 1 2 Matrices Character strings Hello The answer is xmin 10 Pictures Functions myfunc arg ellipse x y r1 r2 2 2 1 0 0 1 0 0 3 4 6 ...

Страница 197: ...uting Values and Setting Constraints in Symbolic Manipulation Displaying a Variable Displaying a Variable Displaying a Variable Displaying a Variable If the variable is undefined the variable name is shown in the result 3 Type the variable name Note TI 89 Titanium users should use j as necessary when typing variable names 4 Press 1 Type the variable name 2 Press In this example the variable a is u...

Страница 198: ...ual value in an expression instead of the variable name In this example the value stored in num1 will be inserted at the cursor position in the entry line 1 Type the variable name into the expression 2 Press to evaluate the expression Note To view a list of existing variable names use 2 as described in Memory and Variable Management If you want the result to replace the variable s previous value y...

Страница 199: ... Indicators Status Line Indicators Status Line Indicators Status Line Indicators Ê Current Folder Ë Modifier Key Ì Angle Mode Í Exact Approx Mode Î Graph Number Ï Graph Mode Ð Replace Batteries Ñ History Pairs Busy Pause Locked Variable Indicator Meaning Current Folder Shows the name of the current folder Refer to Using Folders to Store Independent Sets of Variables in Calculator Home Screen MAIN ...

Страница 200: ...rpreted and displayed To change the Angle mode use the 3 key RAD Radians DEG Degrees GRAD Gradian Exact Approx Mode Shows how answers are calculated and displayed To change the Exact Approx mode use the 3 key AUTO Auto EXACT Exact APPROX Approximate Graph Number If the screen is split to show two independent graphs this indicates which graph is active G1 or G2 Displays GR 1 or GR 2 on the Voyage 2...

Страница 201: ... as soon as possible History Pairs Busy Pause Archived The information shown in this part of the status line depends on the application you are using 23 30 Displayed on the Home screen to show the number of entry answer pairs in the history area Refer to History Information on the Status Line in the Calculator Home Screen module BUSY A calculation or graph is in progress PAUSE You paused a graph o...

Страница 202: ...Operating the Calculator 202 If the next key you press does not have a diamond feature or an associated letter the key performs its normal operation ...

Страница 203: ...rough or modify the history area how to use cut copy and paste and more Note The term calculator Home screen is used in this module Other modules use the term Home screen Both terms are interchangeable and refer to the same screen Displaying the Calculator Home Screen Displaying the Calculator Home Screen Displaying the Calculator Home Screen Displaying the Calculator Home Screen When you first tu...

Страница 204: ...es the main parts of the calculator Home screen Entry answer pairs in the history area are displayed in pretty print Pretty print displays expressions in the same form in which they are written on the board or in textbooks Ê Toolbar Lets you display menus for selecting operations applicable to the calculator Home screen To display a toolbar menu press ƒ etc Ë Pretty Print Display Shows exponents r...

Страница 205: ...onger than the screen width An arrow 8 indicates the answer is continued The entry line contains ellipsis Ellipsis indicates the entry is longer than the screen width Ê Last Entry Pretty print is ON Exponents roots fractions etc are displayed in the same form in which they are traditionally written Ë History Area Lists entry answer pairs you have entered Pairs scroll up the screen as you make new ...

Страница 206: ... to view entries and answers that have scrolled off the screen Recall or auto paste a previous entry or answer onto the entry line so that you can re use or edit it Scrolling through the History Area Scrolling through the History Area Scrolling through the History Area Scrolling through the History Area Normally the cursor is in the entry line However you can move the cursor into the history area ...

Страница 207: ... entry answer pair is saved and the oldest pair is deleted The history indicator does not change View an entry or answer that is too long for one line 8 is at end of line Move the cursor to the entry or answer Use A and B to scroll left and right or 2 A and 2 B to go to the beginning or end respectively Return the cursor to the entry line Press N or press D until the cursor is back on the entry li...

Страница 208: ...hen you want to reexecute those entries use the Text Editor to open the variable as a command script Saving the Entries in the History Area Saving the Entries in the History Area Saving the Entries in the History Area Saving the Entries in the History Area To Do this Change the number of pairs that can be saved Press ƒ and select 9 Format or press H 8 F Then press B use C or D to highlight the new...

Страница 209: ...t you cannot restore them from the calculator Home screen On the calculator Home screen s ƒ toolbar menu 1 Open is not available Instead 2 Specify a folder and text variable that you want to use to store the entries Note Only the entries are saved not the answers Item Description Type Automatically set as Text and cannot be changed Folder Shows the folder in which the text variable will be stored ...

Страница 210: ...nd Pasting Information Cutting Copying and Pasting Information Cutting Copying and Pasting Information Cut copy and paste operations let you move or copy information within the same application or between different applications These operations use the clipboard which is an area in memory that serves as a temporary storage location Auto paste vs Cut Copy Paste Auto paste vs Cut Copy Paste Auto pas...

Страница 211: ...tion to the Clipboard Cutting or Copying Information to the Clipboard Cutting or Copying Information to the Clipboard When you cut or copy information that information is placed in the clipboard However cutting deletes the information from its current location used to move information and copying leaves the information 1 Highlight the characters that you want to cut or copy In the entry line move ...

Страница 212: ...g Information from the Clipboard Pasting Information from the Clipboard Pasting Information from the Clipboard Pasting Information from the Clipboard A paste operation inserts the contents of the clipboard at the current cursor location on the entry line This does not change the contents of the clipboard 1 Position the cursor where you want to paste the information 2 Press ƒ and select 6 Paste or ...

Страница 213: ...n 2 Paste the copied information into a new entry a Begin a new entry and place the cursor where you want to paste the copied information b Press 1 to select the d differentiate function Note You can also reuse an expression by creating a user defined function a Use B or A to highlight the expression b Press H 8 C c For this example press to evaluate the entry c Press H 8 V to paste the copied exp...

Страница 214: ...calculated answer by inserting it into a new expression Reusing the Expression on the Entry Line Reusing the Expression on the Entry Line Reusing the Expression on the Entry Line Reusing the Expression on the Entry Line When you press to evaluate an expression the Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator leaves that expression on the entry line and highlights it You can type over the entry or you can reuse ...

Страница 215: ...of a circle that covers 200 square centimeters Note Editing an entry lets you make minor changes without retyping the entire entry The example below uses 8 as the first guess and then displays the answer in its approximate floating point form You can edit and reexecute using 7 95 and continue until the answer is as accurate as you want Voyage 200 Display 0 NUM NUM 1 NUM 2 Ë NUM Z 2 ...

Страница 216: ...l any previous entry that is stored in the history area even if the entry has scrolled off the top of the screen The recalled entry replaces whatever is currently shown on the entry line You can then reexecute or edit the recalled entry Voyage 200 Display 8 R 2 Ë 2 T R Z 2 8 A 8 7 95 To recall Press Effect The last entry if you ve changed the entry line 2 once If the last entry is still shown on t...

Страница 217: ...Last Answer Recalling the Last Answer Each time you evaluate an expression the Voyage 200 stores the answer to the variable ans 1 To insert this variable in the entry line press 2 Previous entries 2 repeatedly Each press recalls the entry prior to the one shown on the entry line To recall Press Effect If the entry line contains the last entry 2 recalls this entry If the entry line is edited or cle...

Страница 218: ...ference module Auto Pasting an Entry or Answer from the History Auto Pasting an Entry or Answer from the History Auto Pasting an Entry or Answer from the History Auto Pasting an Entry or Answer from the History Area Area Area Area You can select any entry or answer from the history area and auto paste a duplicate of it on the entry line This lets you insert a previous entry or answer into a new ex...

Страница 219: ...asting an Entry or Answer 1 On the entry line place the cursor where you want to insert the entry or answer 2 Press C to move the cursor up into the history area This highlights the last answer For entries Pasting lets you 2 lets you Insert any previous entry into the entry line Replace the contents of the entry line with any previous entry For answers Pasting lets you 2 lets you Insert the displa...

Страница 220: ...User defined functions can be a great time saver when you need to repeat the same expression but with different values multiple times User defined functions can also extend your Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator s capabilities beyond the built in functions C moves from answer to entry up through the history area You can use C to highlight items that have scrolled off the screen Note To cancel auto pa...

Страница 221: ...function or program call Note Function names follow the same rules as variable names Refer to Storing and Recalling Variable Values in Operating the Calculator In the argument list be sure to use the same arguments that are used in the definition For example cube n x3 gives unexpected results when you evaluate the function Arguments x and y in these examples are placeholders that represent whateve...

Страница 222: ... a user defined function whose definition consists of multiple statements The definition can include many of the control and decision making structures If ElseIf Return etc used in programming Note For information about similarities and differences between functions and programs refer to Programming Method Description Store an expression to a function name including the argument list Define comman...

Страница 223: ... Variables not in the argument list must be declared as local Ì Returns a message if nn is not an integer or if nn 0 Í Sums the reciprocals Î Returns the sum When entering a multi statement function on the calculator Home screen you must enter the entire function on a single line Use the Define command just as you would for a single statement function Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ê Func Local temp i If fPart nn ƒ0 o...

Страница 224: ...ting a Function On the calculator Home screen You can use a user defined function just as you would any other function Evaluate it by itself or include it in another expression Define sumrecip nn Func Local temp i EndFunc Use a colon to separate each statement Use argument names that will never be used when calling the function or program Multi statement functions show as Enter a multi statement f...

Страница 225: ... Display a list of Flash application functions Press H 2 Display the definition of a user defined function From the VAR LINK screen highlight the function and display the Contents menu H ˆ or From the calculator Home screen press 2 Type the function name but not the argument list such as xroot and press twice or From the Program Editor open the function Refer to Programming Edit the definition Fro...

Страница 226: ...phing Calculator may not be able to display an answer because there is not enough free memory If an Entry or Answer Is Too Long If an Entry or Answer Is Too Long If an Entry or Answer Is Too Long If an Entry or Answer Is Too Long Move the cursor into the history area and highlight the entry or answer Then use the cursor pad to scroll For example The following shows an answer that is too long for o...

Страница 227: ...ple uses the seq function to generate a sequential list of integers from 1 to 2500 When you see the symbol the answer cannot be displayed even if you highlight it and try to scroll In general you can try to Free up additional memory by deleting unneeded variables and or Flash applications Use 2 as described in Memory and Variable Management Ê Ë Ì Í Ê H Press C or C to scroll up Ë H Press D to scro...

Страница 228: ... described in the Programming module Turning the Custom Menu On and Off Turning the Custom Menu On and Off Turning the Custom Menu On and Off Turning the Custom Menu On and Off When you turn on the custom menu it replaces the normal toolbar menu When you turn it off the normal menu returns For example from the calculator Home screen s normal toolbar menu press 2 to toggle the custom menu on and of...

Страница 229: ...u Restoring the Default Custom Menu Restoring the Default Custom Menu Restoring the Default Custom Menu If a custom menu other than the default is displayed and you want to restore the default Menu Function ƒ Var Common variable names f x Function names such as f x g x and f x y Solve Items related to solving equations Unit Common units such as _m _ft and _l Symbol Symbols such as and Internationa...

Страница 230: ...default Finding the Software Version and ID Number Finding the Software Version and ID Number Finding the Software Version and ID Number Finding the Software Version and ID Number In some situations you may need to find out information about your Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator particularly the software version and the unit s ID number Displaying the About Screen Displaying the About Screen Display...

Страница 231: ...rovide your current software version and or the ID number of your unit If you have difficulties with your Voyage 200 and need to contact technical support knowing the software version may make it easier to diagnose the problem The About screen displays the following information about your calculator Hardware version OS Advanced Mathematics Software version Product identifier Product ID Unit ID App...

Страница 232: ...2 Ê OS version Ë Product identifier Ì Apps certificate revision number Í Hardware version Î Unit ID required to obtain certificates for installing purchased Apps Your screen will be different from the one shown above Ê Ë Ì Í Î ...

Страница 233: ...aic expression that you anticipated How Undefined and Defined Variables Are Treated How Undefined and Defined Variables Are Treated How Undefined and Defined Variables Are Treated How Undefined and Defined Variables Are Treated When you enter an expression that contains a variable the Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator treats the variable in one of two ways To see why this is important suppose you wan...

Страница 234: ...efining a variable it s a good practice to use more than one character in the name Leave one character names undefined for symbolic calculations Method Example Enter the variable name Use the isVar function Unless you knew that 5 had been stored to x previously the answer 75 could be misleading If defined the variable s value is displayed If undefined the variable name is displayed If defined true...

Страница 235: ...ation 235 Note Use 2 to view a list of defined variables as described in Memory and Variable Management Use the getType function Method Example If defined the variable s type is displayed If undefined NONE is displayed ...

Страница 236: ... defined variable by deleting it To delete Do this One or more specified variables Use the DelVar function You can also delete variables by using the VAR LINK screen 2 as described in Memory and Variable Management All variables of a specific type Note The Deltype function deletes all variables of the specified type in all folders Use the Deltype function ...

Страница 237: ...perator refer to Typing the With Operator To type the with operator press H 2 Í All one letter variables a z in the current folder Note For information about folders refer to the Calculator Home Screen module From the Home screen Clean Up menu select 1 Clear a z You will be prompted to press to confirm the deletion Temporarily override a variable s defined value Temporarily define a value for an u...

Страница 238: ...When Exact Approx EXACT the handheld uses exact rational arithmetic with up to 614 digits in the numerator and 614 digits in the denominator The EXACT setting Transforms irrational numbers to standard forms as much as possible without approximating them For example transforms to and ln 1000 transforms to 3 ln 10 Converts floating point numbers to rational numbers For example 0 25 transforms to 1 4...

Страница 239: ...s Certain built in functions that expect one of their arguments to be an integer will convert that number to an integer if possible For example d y x x 2 0 transforms to d y x x 2 Whole number floating point exponents are converted to integers For example x2 0 transforms to x2 even in the APPROXIMATE setting Advantages Disadvantages Results are exact As you use more complicated rational numbers an...

Страница 240: ...ave time and or use less memory than the EXACT setting Approximate results are sometimes more compact and comprehensible than exact results Results with undefined variables or functions often exhibit incomplete cancellation For example a coefficient that should be 0 might be displayed as a small magnitude such as 1 23457E 11 If you do not plan to use symbolic computations approximate results are s...

Страница 241: ...ssible exactly and then use approximate numerical methods if necessary to determine additional solutions Similarly ä integrate uses approximate numerical methods if appropriate where exact symbolic methods fail Advantages Disadvantages You see exact results when practical and approximate numeric results when exact results are impractical You can often control the format of a result by choosing to ...

Страница 242: ...ults Default simplification does not modify variables that use path names to indicate a folder For example x class x does not simplify to 2x Note For information about folders refer to the Calculator Home Screen module For functions The arguments are simplified Some built in functions delay simplification of some of their arguments If the function is a built in or user defined function the functio...

Страница 243: ... are assumed to represent constants and are placed in alphabetical order at the end of a sum but before numbers Numeric subexpressions are combined Products and sums are sorted into order Similar factors and similar terms are collected Identities involving zeros and ones are exploited This floating point number causes numeric results to be shown as floating point If a floating point whole number i...

Страница 244: ...ry for simplification To interrupt a simplification process that is taking too long press You can then try simplifying only a portion of the expression Auto paste the entire expression on the entry line and then delete the unwanted parts Polynomial greatest common divisors are canceled Polynomials are expanded unless no key cancellation can occur Common denominators are formed unless no key cancel...

Страница 245: ...that Use Delayed Simplification Functions that Use Delayed Simplification Functions that use delayed simplification have a required var argument that performs the function with respect to a variable These functions have at least two arguments with the general form function expression var Note Not all functions that use a var argument use delayed simplification For a function that uses delayed simp...

Страница 246: ...the right finds the derivative of x3 at x 5 If x3 was initially simplified to 75 you would find the derivative of 75 which is not what you want x cannot be simplified x is not simplified The function uses x3 and then substitutes 5 for x x is simplified to t The function uses t3 x is simplified to t The function uses t3 and then substitutes 5 for t ...

Страница 247: ...ecify domain constraints Typing the With Operator Typing the With Operator Typing the With Operator Typing the With Operator To type the with operator press H 2 Í Substituting for a Variable Substituting for a Variable Substituting for a Variable Substituting for a Variable For every occurrence of a specified variable you can substitute a numeric value or an expression To substitute for multiple v...

Страница 248: ...alysis you must define a complex variable For example x yi z Then you can use z as a complex variable You can also use z_ For more information see the _ underscore topic in the Technical Reference module For every occurrence of a simple expression you can substitute a variable numeric value or another expression By replacing a commonly used or long term you can display results in a more compact fo...

Страница 249: ... the keyboard Be Aware of the Limitations of Substitutions Be Aware of the Limitations of Substitutions Be Aware of the Limitations of Substitutions Be Aware of the Limitations of Substitutions Substitution occurs only where there is an exact match for the substitution Only x2 was replaced not x4 Define the substitution in simpler terms for a more complete substitution ...

Страница 250: ...cursion Internally an expression is sorted according to the automatic simplification rules Therefore products and sums may not match the order in which you entered them An error message is displayed When you press N an error is shown in the history area As a general rule you should substitute for a single variable sin x x x 1 Substitutes sin x 1 sin x 1 1 sin x 1 1 1 etc ...

Страница 251: ... domain constraint Substituting for more general expressions either møc2 e or c2 øm e may not work as you anticipate Note Use the solve function to help determine the single variable substitution ln x y ln x ln y only if x and or y is not negative Sin 1 sin q q only if q Lp 2 and q p 2 radians Because ln x y ln x ln y is not always valid the logarithms are not combined With a constraint the identi...

Страница 252: ...utions vs Defining a Variable Using Substitutions vs Defining a Variable However substitution is preferable for most cases because the variable is defined only for the current calculation and does not accidentally affect later calculations Because sinL1 sin q q is not always valid the expression is not simplified With a constraint the expression can be simplified In many cases you can achieve the ...

Страница 253: ...of the Algebra Menu Overview of the Algebra Menu You can use the Algebra toolbar menu to select the most commonly used algebraic functions The Algebra Menu The Algebra Menu The Algebra Menu The Algebra Menu From the Home screen press to display Storing 1 x affects the subsequent calculations calculation This menu is also available from the MATH menu Press 2 I and then select 9 Algebra ...

Страница 254: ...espect to all its variables or with respect to only a specified variable zeros Determines the values of a specified variable that make an expression equal to zero Displays in a list approx Evaluates an expression using floating point arithmetic where possible This is equivalent to using 3 to set Exact Approx APPROXIMATE or using 8 to evaluate an expression comDenom Calculates a common denominator ...

Страница 255: ...multiple angles tCollect is the opposite of tExpand Complex Displays the submenu These are the same as solve factor and zeros but they also compute complex results Extract Displays the submenu getNum Applies comDenom and then returns the resulting numerator getDenom Applies comDenom and then returns the resulting denominator left Returns the left hand side of an equation or inequality Menu Item De...

Страница 256: ...n gives examples for some of the functions available from the Algebra toolbar menu For complete information about any function refer to the Technical Reference module Some algebraic operations do not require a special function Adding or Dividing Polynomials Adding or Dividing Polynomials Adding or Dividing Polynomials Adding or Dividing Polynomials right Returns the right hand side of an equation ...

Страница 257: ...umber Finding Prime Factors of a Number Finding Prime Factors of a Number The factor 2 function lets you do more than simply factor an algebraic polynomial Factor x5 N 1 Then expand the result Notice that factor and expand perform opposite operations You can find prime factors of a rational number either an integer or a ratio of integers factor expression var for factoring with respect to a variab...

Страница 258: ...ansion that collects similar powers of a variable Solving an Equation Solving an Equation Solving an Equation Solving an Equation Use the solve 1 function to solve an equation for a specified variable solve equation var Do a full expansion of x2 Nx y2 Ny with respect to all variables Then do a partial expansion with respect to x Solve x y N 5 2x N 5y for x Notice that solve displays only the final...

Страница 259: ...tem of equations use any of the following methods Consider a set of two equations with two unknowns 2x N 3y 4 Lx 7y L12 Method Example Use the solve function for a one step solution solve 2xN3y 4 and Lx 7y L12 x y Use the solve function with substitution for step by step manipulation Substitutions are in the form of an equality such as x 3 or y sin x To be most effective the left side should be a ...

Страница 260: ...s are not on the Algebra menu Use 2 I 4 or the Catalog Use the simult function with a matrix Enter the coefficients as a matrix and the results as a constant column matrix Use the rref function with a matrix Enter the coefficients as an augmented matrix Method Example ...

Страница 261: ...n Expression Finding the Zeros of an Expression Use the zeros 4 function zeros expression var Use the expression x sin x cos x Find the zeros with respect to x in the interval 0 x and x 3 Note For or type 8 Ã or 8 Â You can also use 2 I 8 or 2 G 2 to select them from a menu Use the with operator to specify the interval ...

Страница 262: ...ession x4 N 2x2 x 2x2 x 4 Then transform the answer into a ratio of a fully expanded numerator and a fully expanded denominator Notice that propFrac and comDenom perform opposite operations Note You can use comDenom with an expression list or matrix propFrac rational expression var for proper fractions with respect to a variable comDenom expression var for common denominators that collect similar ...

Страница 263: ...ommonly used calculus functions The Calc Menu The Calc Menu The Calc Menu The Calc Menu From the Home screen press to display Note For a complete description of each function and its syntax refer to the Technical Reference module This menu is also available from the MATH menu Press 2 I and then select A Calculus Menu Item Description d differentiate Differentiates an expression with respect to a s...

Страница 264: ...specified variable that maximize an expression arcLen Returns the arc length of an expression with respect to a specified variable taylor Calculates a Taylor polynomial approximation to an expression with respect to a specified variable nDeriv Calculates the numerical derivative of an expression with respect to a specified variable nInt Calculates an integral as a floating point number using quadr...

Страница 265: ...alc toolbar menu For complete information about any calculus function refer to the Technical Reference module Integrating and Differentiating Integrating and Differentiating Integrating and Differentiating Integrating and Differentiating Use the integrate 2 and d differentiate 1 functions d expression var order Integrate x2 sin x with respect to x Differentiate the answer with respect to x express...

Страница 266: ...matrix Finding a Limit Finding a Limit Finding a Limit Finding a Limit Use the limit 3 function Note You can find a limit for an expression list or matrix Find the limit of sin 3x x as x approaches 0 limit expression var point direction negative number from left positive number from right omitted number or 0 both ...

Страница 267: ...lation User Defined Functions and Symbolic Manipulation User Defined Functions and Symbolic Manipulation User Defined Functions and Symbolic Manipulation You can use a user defined function as an argument for the Voyage 200 s built in algebra and calculus functions Find a 6th order Taylor polynomial for sin x with respect to x Store the answer as a user defined function named y1 x Then graph sin x...

Страница 268: ...le Overview of Entering a Function in the Programming module Undefined Functions Undefined Functions Undefined Functions Undefined Functions You can use functions such as f x g t r q etc that have not been assigned a definition These undefined functions yield symbolic results For example Single Statement Functions Single Statement Functions Single Statement Functions Single Statement Functions You...

Страница 269: ...ement vs Single Statement Functions Multi statement user defined functions should be used as an argument for numeric functions such as nDeriv and nInt only Then find the limit of sec x as x approaches p 4 Note To select limit from the Calc toolbar menu press 3 Then find a 5th order Taylor polynomial for h x with respect to x Note To select from the Calc toolbar menu press 2 or press 2 on the keybo...

Страница 270: ...ction with two pieces If you were to create a multi statement user defined function with the form Note To select nInt from the Calc toolbar menu press B nInt When Use expression x 0 x 0 Lx 5 cos x Func If x 0 Then Return ëx Else Return 5cos x EndIf EndFunc Then numerically integrate y1 x with respect to x Define y1 x Func If x 0 Then EndFunc ...

Страница 271: ...n the handheld may run out of memory before a result can be calculated Freeing Up Memory Freeing Up Memory Freeing Up Memory Freeing Up Memory Delete unneeded variables and or Flash applications particularly large sized ones Use 2 as described in Memory and Variable Management to view and delete variables and or Flash applications On the Home screen Use the Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator s built i...

Страница 272: ...solve b 0 var Solve each part and combine the results If several undefined variables occur only in a certain combination replace that combination with a single variable If m and c occur only as m c2 substitute e for m c2 In the expression substitute c for a b and use In the solution replace c with a b For expressions combined over a common denominator replace sums in denominators with unique new u...

Страница 273: ...ion Special Constants Used in Symbolic Manipulation Special Constants Used in Symbolic Manipulation The result of a calculation may include one of the special constants described in this section In some cases you may also need to enter a constant as part of your entry true false true false true false true false These indicate the result of an identity or a Boolean expression x x is true for any va...

Страница 274: ...rs multiple times in the same session each occurrence is numbered consecutively After it reaches 255 arbitrary integer consecutive numbering restarts at n0 Use Clean Up 2 NewProb to reset to n1 Note For press H 2 R A solution is at every integer multiple of p Both n and n2 represent any arbitrary integer but this notation identifies separate arbitrary integers ...

Страница 275: ...ary constant that represents any integer When an arbitrary constant occurs multiple times in the same session each occurrence is numbered consecutively After it reaches 255 arbitrary integer consecutive numbering restarts at 0 Use Clean Up 2 NewProb to reset to 1 Note For press H 2 R ...

Страница 276: ...he result is undefined ˆ represents infinity and e represents the constant 2 71828 base of the natural logarithms These constants are often used in entries as well as results Notes For ˆ press H 2 For e press H 2 s Mathematically undefined ˆ undetermined sign Non unique limit ...

Страница 277: ... menu to select from a list of available constants and units or you can type them directly from the keyboard From a Menu From a Menu From a Menu From a Menu The following shows how to select a unit but you can use the same general procedure to select a constant From the Home screen 1 Type the value or expression 2 Display the UNITS dialog box Press 8 À 3 Use D and C to move the cursor to the appli...

Страница 278: ... However if you are adding units to a variable you must put a space or before the underscore For example x_m is treated as a variable not as x with a unit Note You can type units in either uppercase or lowercase characters 4 To select the highlighted default unit press or To select a different unit from the category press B Then highlight the applicable unit and press Note If you created a user de...

Страница 279: ...gories Note Create a user defined unit for frequently used combinations For example suppose you want to enter a velocity in meters per second In the UNITS dialog box however the Velocity category does not contain this unit You can enter meters per second by combining _m and _s from the Length and Time categories respectively 3 9 8_m _s Combine the units _m and _s There is no pre defined m _s unit ...

Страница 280: ...or example Note If you have any doubt about how a value and its units will be evaluated group them within parentheses Here s why you get unexpected units if you do not use parentheses In a calculation a unit is treated similar to a variable For example 100_m is treated as 100 _m and 2_s is treated as 2 _s Without parentheses the entry is calculated as 100 _m 2 _s _s 50 _m _s To calculate Enter 100...

Страница 281: ...l Units Except Temperature For All Units Except Temperature If you use a unit in a calculation it is converted and displayed automatically in the current default unit for that category unless you use the 4 conversion operator as described later The following examples assume that your default units are set to the SI system of metric units Notes Refer to the list of pre defined units From the UNITS ...

Страница 282: ...want to convert to a unit other than the default use the 4 conversion operator To convert 4 light years to kilometers 4_ltyr 4 _km To convert 186000 miles second to kilometers hour 186000_mi _s 4 _km _hr expression_unit1 4 _unit2 For 4 press 2 4 ...

Страница 283: ...6000 miles second from miles to kilometers 186000_mi _s 4 _km To convert 186000 miles second from seconds to hours 186000_mi _s 4 1 _hr To enter meters per second squared 27_m _s 2 To convert meters per second squared from seconds to hours 27_m _s 2 4 1 _hr 2 Because a Time conversion is not specified it is shown in its default unit _s in this example Because a Length conversion is not specified i...

Страница 284: ...ture Values For Temperature Values For Temperature Values To convert a temperature value you must use tmpCnv instead of the 4 operator For example to convert 100_ C to _ F tmpCnv 100_ c _ f tmpCnv expression_ tempUnit1 _ tempUnit2 For press 2 v 0 1 0 0 3 2 2 1 2 _C _F o o ...

Страница 285: ...ting the Default Units for Displayed Results Setting the Default Units for Displayed Results Setting the Default Units for Displayed Results All results involving units are displayed in the default unit for that category For example if the default unit for Length is _m any length result is displayed in meters even if you entered _km or _ft in the calculation For example to convert a 100_ C range t...

Страница 286: ... Setting Custom Defaults The SI and ENG US systems of measurement set from Page 3 of the MODE screen use built in default units which you cannot change The default units for these systems are available To set custom defaults 1 Press 3 B 3 to set Unit System CUSTOM 2 Press D to highlight SET DEFAULTS 3 Press B to display the CUSTOM UNIT DEFAULTS dialog box If Unit System SI or ENG US the Custom Uni...

Страница 287: ... the NONE Default What is the NONE Default What is the NONE Default Many categories let you select NONE as the default unit 4 For each category you can highlight its default press B and select a unit from the list 5 Press twice to save your changes and exit the MODE screen This means that results in that category are displayed in the default units of its components For example Area Length2 so Leng...

Страница 288: ...se standalone units Why Use Your Own Units Why Use Your Own Units Why Use Your Own Units Why Use Your Own Units Some example reasons to create a unit are You want to enter length values in dekameters Define 10_m as a new unit named _dm Instead of entering _m _s2 as an acceleration unit you define that combination of units as a single unit named _ms2 You want to calculate how many times someone bli...

Страница 289: ...2 5 Second character can be any valid variable name character except _ or a digit For example _9f is not valid Remaining characters up to 6 can be any valid variable name character except an underscore Defining a Unit Defining a Unit Defining a Unit Defining a Unit Define a unit the same way you store to a variable For example to define a dekameter unit 10_m _dm To define an acceleration unit _m _...

Страница 290: ...defined constants and units by category You can select any of these from the UNITS dialog box If you use 3 to set default units note that categories with only one defined unit are not listed Defaults for SI and ENG US Defaults for SI and ENG US Defaults for SI and ENG US Defaults for SI and ENG US The SI and ENG US systems of measurement use built in default units In this section the built in defa...

Страница 291: ...nt 1 3806505E M23_J _ K _Me electron rest mass 9 1093826E M31_kg _Mn neutron rest mass 1 67492728E M27_kg _Mp proton rest mass 1 67262171E M27_kg _Na Avogadro s number 6 0221415E23 _mol _q electron charge 1 60217653E M19_coul _Rb Bohr radius 5 291772108E M11_m _Rc molar gas constant 8 314472_J _mol _ K _Rdb Rydberg constant 10973731 568525 _m _Vm molar volume 2 2413996E M2_m3 _mol _H0 permittivity...

Страница 292: ...time of printing from the CODATA Internationally recommended values of the Fundamental Physical Constants available on the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST web site http physics nist gov cuu Constants index html Length Length Length Length _m0 permeability of a vacuum 1 2566370614359E M6_N _A2 _mb Bohr magneton 9 27400949E M24_J ø_m2 _Wb _Ang angstrom _mi mile _au astronomical u...

Страница 293: ...n _ltyr light year _Å angstrom _m meter SI _acre acre NONE SI ENG US _ha hectare _cup cup _ml milliliter _floz fluid ounce _pt pint _flozUK British fluid ounce _qt quart _gal gallon _tbsp tablespoon _galUK British gallon _tsp teaspoon _l liter NONE SI ENG US _day day _s second SI ENG US _hr hour _week week _min minute _yr year ...

Страница 294: ...erature Temperature Temperature Luminous Intensity Luminous Intensity Luminous Intensity Luminous Intensity _ms millisecond _ms microsecond _ns nanosecond _knot knot _mph miles per hour _kph kilometers per hour NONE SI ENG US no pre defined units _ C Celsius For press 2 _ K Kelvin _ F Fahrenheit _ R Rankine no default _cd candela no default ...

Страница 295: ...rgy Energy Energy Energy _mol mole no default _amu atomic mass unit _oz ounce _gm gram _slug slug _kg kilogram SI _ton ton _lb pound ENG US _tonne metric ton _mg milligram _tonUK long ton _mton metric ton _dyne dyne _N newton SI _kgf kilogram force _tonf ton force _lbf pound force ENG US _Btu British thermal unit ENG US _J joule SI _cal calorie _kcal kilocalorie ...

Страница 296: ...ity Kinematic _erg erg _kWh kilowatt hour _eV electron volt _latm liter atmosphere _ftlb foot pound _hp horsepower ENG US _W watt SI _kW kilowatt _atm atmosphere _mmHg millimeters of mercury _bar bar _Pa pascal SI _inH2O inches of water _psi pounds per square inch ENG US _inHg inches of mercury _torr millimeters of mercury _mmH2O millimeters of water _St stokes ...

Страница 297: ...ctric Current Electric Current Electric Current Electric Current Charge Charge Charge Charge Potential Potential Potential Potential _P poise _GHz gigahertz _kHz kilohertz _Hz hertz SI ENG US _MHz megahertz _A ampere SI ENG US _mA milliampere _kA kiloampere _mA microampere _coul coulomb SI ENG US _kV kilovolt _V volt SI ENG US _mV millivolt _volt volt ...

Страница 298: ...Mag Field Strength Mag Field Strength Mag Field Strength Mag Field Strength Mag Flux Density Mag Flux Density Mag Flux Density Mag Flux Density _kJ kilo ohm _ohm ohm _MJ megaohm _J ohm SI ENG US _mho mho ENG US _siemens siemens SI _mmho millimho _mmho micromho _F farad SI ENG US _pF picofarad _nF nanofarad _mF microfarad _Oe oersted NONE SI ENG US _Gs gauss _T tesla SI ENG US ...

Страница 299: ...and Measurement Units 299 Magnetic Flux Magnetic Flux Magnetic Flux Magnetic Flux Inductance Inductance Inductance Inductance _Wb weber SI ENG US _henry henry SI ENG US _nH nanohenry _mH millihenry _mH microhenry ...

Страница 300: ...r a detailed description of each step refer to the following pages You may not need to do all the steps each time you graph a function Graphing Functions Graphing Functions Graphing Functions Graphing Functions 1 Set Graph mode 3 to FUNCTION Also set Angle mode if necessary 2 Define x and y components on Y Editor 8 3 Select which defined functions to graph Note To turn off any stat data plots pres...

Страница 301: ...on of the graph Use the Math toolbar menu to find a zero minimum maximum etc Setting the Graph Mode Setting the Graph Mode Setting the Graph Mode Setting the Graph Mode Before graphing y x functions you must select FUNCTION graphing You may also need to set the Angle mode which affects how the Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator graphs trigonometric functions 5 Define the viewing window 8 Zoom also cha...

Страница 302: ...aphs that use powers such as x1 3 While this module specifically describes y x function graphs the calculator lets you select from six Graph mode settings 1 Press 3 to display the MODE dialog box which shows the current mode settings Graph Mode Setting Description FUNCTION y x functions PARAMETRIC x t and y t parametric equations POLAR r q polar equations SEQUENCE u n sequences 3D z x y 3D equatio...

Страница 303: ...atus line at the bottom of the screen Defining Functions for Graphing Defining Functions for Graphing Defining Functions for Graphing Defining Functions for Graphing In FUNCTION graphing mode you can graph functions named y1 x through y99 x To define and edit these functions use the Y Editor The Y Editor lists function names for the current graphing mode For example in POLAR graphing mode function...

Страница 304: ... matrices lists and other functions Only floats and lists of floats will produce a plot Note For an undefined function you do not need to press or When you begin typing the cursor moves to the entry line 5 When you complete the expression press The function list now shows the new function which is automatically selected for graphing Note If you accidentally move the cursor to the entry line press ...

Страница 305: ...it Refer to Editing an Expression in the Entry Line in Operating the Calculator or Press M once or twice to clear the old expression and then type the new one 4 Press The function list now shows the edited function which is automatically selected for graphing Note To cancel any editing changes press N instead of Clearing a Function Clearing a Function Clearing a Function Clearing a Function From t...

Страница 306: ...r a Program From the Home Screen or a Program From the Home Screen or a Program You can also define and evaluate a function from the Home screen or a program Use the Define and Graph commands Refer to A function from the entry line Press M once or twice depending on the cursor s location and then press All functions Press ƒ and then select 8 Clear Functions When prompted for confirmation press Pre...

Страница 307: ...r in the Y Editor use function names y1 x y2 x etc Selecting Functions to Graph Selecting Functions to Graph Selecting Functions to Graph Selecting Functions to Graph Regardless of how many functions are defined in the Y Editor you can select the ones you want to graph Selecting or Deselecting Functions Selecting or Deselecting Functions Selecting or Deselecting Functions Selecting or Deselecting ...

Страница 308: ...deselect functions from the Home screen or a program Use the FnOn and FnOff commands available from the Home screen s Other toolbar menu for functions Refer to the Technical Reference module Use the PlotsOn and PlotsOff commands for stat plots Refer to the Technical Reference module To select or deselect Do this A specified function Move the cursor to highlight the function Press This procedure se...

Страница 309: ...playing or Changing a Function s Style Displaying or Changing a Function s Style Displaying or Changing a Function s Style From the Y Editor 1 Move the cursor to highlight the applicable function 2 Select the Style menu and press ˆ 3 To make a change select the applicable style Although the Line item is initially highlighted the function s current style is indicated by a Ÿ mark To exit the menu wi...

Страница 310: ... The fifth shaded function reuses the first pattern From the Home Screen or a Program From the Home Screen or a Program From the Home Screen or a Program From the Home Screen or a Program You can also set a function s style from the Home screen or a program Refer to the Style command in the Technical Reference module Animate A round cursor moves along the leading edge of the graph but does not lea...

Страница 311: ...metric graphs etc have their own independent set of Window variables Displaying Window Variables in the Window Editor Displaying Window Variables in the Window Editor Displaying Window Variables in the Window Editor Displaying Window Variables in the Window Editor Press 8 to display the Window Editor Window Variables shown in Window Editor Corresponding Viewing Window shown on Graph screen Variabl...

Страница 312: ...egin typing or Press M to clear the old value then type the new one or Press A or B to remove the highlighting then edit the value Values are stored as you type them you do not need to press simply moves the cursor to the next Window variable If you type an expression it is evaluated when you move the cursor to a different Window variable or leave the Window Editor xres Sets pixel resolution 1 thr...

Страница 313: ...nce elements such as the axes a grid and the cursor s coordinates Function graphs parametric graphs etc have their own independent set of graph formats Displaying Graph Format Settings Displaying Graph Format Settings Displaying Graph Format Settings Displaying Graph Format Settings From the Y Editor Window Editor or Graph screen press ƒ and select 9 Format You also can display the GRAPH FORMATS d...

Страница 314: ...then press or Press the number for that setting Graph Order Graphs functions one at a time SEQ or all at the same time SIMUL Not available when Discontinuity Detection is set to ON Grid Shows ON or hides OFF grid points that correspond to the tick marks on the axes Axes Shows ON or hides OFF the x and y axes Leading Cursor Shows ON or hides OFF a reference cursor that tracks the functions as they ...

Страница 315: ...nctions display the Graph screen This screen uses the display style and viewing window that you previously defined Displaying the Graph Screen Displaying the Graph Screen Displaying the Graph Screen Displaying the Graph Screen Press 8 The Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator automatically graphs the selected functions If you select an Zoom operation from the Y Editor or Window Editor the Voyage 200 auto...

Страница 316: ...this Redefine the viewing window with different boundaries Use a Zoom operation Smart Graph Smart Graph Smart Graph Smart Graph When you display the Graph screen the Smart Graph feature displays the previous window contents immediately provided nothing has changed that requires regraphing Smart Graph updates the window and regraphs only if you have Changed a mode setting that affects graphing a fu...

Страница 317: ...Moving Cursor Free Moving Cursor Free Moving Cursor When you first display the Graph screen no cursor is visible To display the cursor press a cursor pad arrow The cursor moves from the center of the screen and its coordinates are displayed If your screen does not show coordinates set the graph format so that Coordinates RECT or POLAR Press 8 F To move the free moving cursor Press To an adjoining ...

Страница 318: ... accuracy Use the Trace tool described on the next page to display coordinates that are on the function Use a Zoom operation to zoom in on a portion of the graph Tracing a Function Tracing a Function Tracing a Function Tracing a Function To display the exact coordinates of any plotted point on a graphed function use the Trace tool Unlike the free moving cursor the trace cursor moves only along a f...

Страница 319: ...part of the screen If any stat plots are graphed the trace cursor appears on the lowest numbered stat plot Moving along a Function Moving along a Function Moving along a Function Moving along a Function Note If you enter an x value it must be between xmin and xmax The trace cursor moves only from plotted point to plotted point along the function not from pixel to pixel To move the trace cursor Do ...

Страница 320: ...inate values show its correct coordinates Note Use QuickCenter to trace a function that goes above or below the window Moving from Function to Function Moving from Function to Function Moving from Function to Function Moving from Function to Function Press C or D to move to the previous or next selected function at the same x value The new function number is shown on the screen The previous or nex...

Страница 321: ...he graph is drawn After an automatic pan the cursor continues tracing Note Automatic panning does not work if stat plots are displayed or if a function uses a shaded display style Using QuickCenter Using QuickCenter Using QuickCenter Using QuickCenter If you trace a function off the top or bottom of the viewing window you can press to center the viewing window on the cursor location Before automat...

Страница 322: ...plication screen such as the Y Editor When you return to the Graph screen and press to begin tracing If Smart Graph regraphed the screen the cursor appears at the middle x value If Smart Graph does not regraph the screen the cursor appears at its previous location before you displayed the other application Using Zooms to Explore a Graph Using Zooms to Explore a Graph Using Zooms to Explore a Graph...

Страница 323: ...ory and SetFactors are given later in this section For more information about the other items refer to the Technical Reference module Zoom Tool Description ZoomBox Lets you draw a box and zoom in on that box ZoomIn ZoomOut Lets you select a point and zoom in or out by an amount defined by SetFactors ZoomDec Sets x and y to 1 and centers the origin ZoomSqr Adjusts Window variables so that a square ...

Страница 324: ...ets you select a new center point and then sets x and y to 1 and sets xscl and yscl to 10 ZoomData Adjusts Window variables so that all selected stat plots are in view ZoomFit Adjusts the viewing window to display the full range of dependent variable values for the selected functions In function graphing this maintains the current xmin and xmax and adjusts ymin and ymax Memory Lets you store and r...

Страница 325: ...the box you want to define and then press The cursor changes to a small square and the screen prompts for 2nd Corner Note To move the cursor in larger increments use 2 B 2 D etc 3 Move the cursor to the opposite corner of the zoom box As you move the cursor the box stretches 4 When you have outlined the area you want to zoom in on press The Graph screen shows the zoomed area You can cancel ZoomBox...

Страница 326: ...act and the y variables are multiplied by yFact new xmin xmin ù xFact etc Changing Zoom Factors Changing Zoom Factors Changing Zoom Factors Changing Zoom Factors The Zoom factors define the magnification and reduction used by ZoomIn and ZoomOut 1 From the Zoom menu select 2 ZoomIn or 3 ZoomOut A cursor appears and the screen prompts for New Center 2 Move the cursor to the point where you want to z...

Страница 327: ... edit the old value 3 Press after typing in an input box you must press twice to save any changes and exit the dialog box Saving or Recalling a Viewing Window Saving or Recalling a Viewing Window Saving or Recalling a Viewing Window Saving or Recalling a Viewing Window After using various Zoom tools you may want to return to a previous viewing window or save the current one Zoom factors must be 1 ...

Страница 328: ... From the Zoom menu select 6 ZoomStd Using Math Tools to Analyze Functions Using Math Tools to Analyze Functions Using Math Tools to Analyze Functions Using Math Tools to Analyze Functions On the Graph screen the Math toolbar menu has several tools that help you analyze graphed functions Select To 1 ZoomPrev Return to the viewing window displayed before the previous zoom 2 ZoomSto Save the current...

Страница 329: ... Minimum Maximum Finds a zero x intercept minimum or maximum point within an interval Intersection Finds the intersection of two functions Derivatives Finds the derivative slope at a point f x dx Finds the approximate numerical integral over an interval Inflection Finds the inflection point of a curve where its second derivative changes sign where the curve changes concavity Distance Draws and mea...

Страница 330: ...and xmax The value can be an expression 4 Press D or C to move the cursor between functions at the entered x value The corresponding y value is displayed If you press A or B the free moving cursor appears You may not be able to move it back to the entered x value Shade Depends on the number of functions graphed If only one function is graphed this shades the function s area above or below the x ax...

Страница 331: ...o move the cursor to the lower bound or type its x value 4 Press A 4 at the top of the screen marks the lower bound Finding the Intersection of Two Functions within an Interval Finding the Intersection of Two Functions within an Interval Finding the Intersection of Two Functions within an Interval Finding the Intersection of Two Functions within an Interval 1 From the Graph screen press and select...

Страница 332: ...Finding the Numerical Integral over an Interval Finding the Numerical Integral over an Interval Finding the Numerical Integral over an Interval Finding the Numerical Integral over an Interval 1 From the Graph screen press and select 7 f x dx 2 As necessary use D and C to select the applicable function Note Typing x values is a quick way to set the limits 6 Set the upper bound and press The cursor ...

Страница 333: ... 2 As necessary use D and C to select the applicable function 3 Set the lower bound for x Either use A and B to move the cursor to the lower bound or type its x value 4 Press A 4 at the top of the screen marks the lower bound Finding the Distance between Two Points Finding the Distance between Two Points Finding the Distance between Two Points Finding the Distance between Two Points 1 From the Gra...

Страница 334: ...or to set the point a line is drawn as you move the cursor Drawing a Tangent Line Drawing a Tangent Line Drawing a Tangent Line Drawing a Tangent Line 1 From the Graph screen press and select A Tangent 2 As necessary use D and C to select the applicable function Note To erase a drawn tangent line press ReGraph 7 Press The distance between the two points is displayed along with the connecting line ...

Страница 335: ...on and the x Axis Shading the Area between a Function and the x Axis Shading the Area between a Function and the x Axis Shading the Area between a Function and the x Axis You must have only one function graphed If you graph two or more functions the Shade tool shades the area between two functions 1 From the Graph screen press and select C Shade The screen prompts for Above X axis 2 Select one of ...

Страница 336: ... between Two Functions within an Interval Shading the Area between Two Functions within an Interval You must have at least two functions graphed If you graph only one function the Shade tool shades the area between the function and the x axis 1 From the Graph screen press and select C Shade The screen prompts for Above 2 As necessary use D or C to select a function Shading will be above this funct...

Страница 337: ...If you do not press A or B or type an x value when setting the lower and upper bound xmin and xmax will be used as the lower and upper bound respectively 7 Press A 4 at the top of the screen marks the lower bound 8 Set the upper bound and press The bounded area is shaded To erase the shaded area press ReGraph Below function Above function ...

Страница 338: ...eral steps used for y x functions as described in Basic Function Graphing Any differences that apply to polar equations are described on the following pages Graphing Polar Equations Graphing Polar Equations Graphing Polar Equations Graphing Polar Equations 1 Set Graph mode 3 to POLAR Also set Angle mode if necessary 2 Define x and y components on Y Editor 8 3 Select which defined equations to grap...

Страница 339: ...t by tracing a polar equation Use the Zoom toolbar menu to zoom in or out on a portion of the graph 4 Set the display style for an equation You can set either the x or y component ˆ This is optional For multiple equations this helps visually distinguish one from another 5 Define the viewing window 8 Zoom also changes the viewing window 6 Change the graph format if necessary ƒ 9 or 8 F 7 Graph the ...

Страница 340: ...cribes the differences that apply to polar equations Setting the Graph Mode Setting the Graph Mode Setting the Graph Mode Setting the Graph Mode Use 3 to set Graph POLAR before you define equations or set Window variables The Y Editor and the Window Editor let you enter information for the current Graph mode setting only You should also set the Angle mode to the units RADIAN or DEGREE you want to ...

Страница 341: ...s are still defined in the Y Editor When you return to POLAR graphing mode your r q equations are still defined Selecting the Display Style Selecting the Display Style Selecting the Display Style Selecting the Display Style The Above and Below styles are not available for polar equations and are dimmed on the Y Editor s Style toolbar menu Window Variables Window Variables Window Variables Window V...

Страница 342: ...t Setting the Graph Format Setting the Graph Format Setting the Graph Format To display coordinates as r and q values use qstep Increment for the q value Polar equations are evaluated at r qmin r qmin qstep r qmin 2 qstep not to exceed r qmax xmin xmax ymin ymax Boundaries of the viewing window xscl yscl Distance between tick marks on the x and y axes qmin 0 xmin L10 ymin L10 qmax 2p 6 2831853 rad...

Страница 343: ...ring a Graph As in function graphing you can explore a graph by using the following tools Any displayed coordinates are shown in polar or rectangular form as set in the graph format Tool For Polar Graphs Free Moving Cursor Works just as it does for function graphs Zoom Works just as it does for function graphs Only x xmin xmax xscl and y ymin ymax yscl Window variables are affected The q Window va...

Страница 344: ...t or right press to center the viewing window on the cursor location Automatic panning is not available If you move the cursor off the left or right side of the screen the TI 89 Titanium Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator will not automatically pan the viewing window However you can use QuickCenter Math Only 1 Value 6 Derivatives 9 Distance A Tangent and B Arc are available for polar graphs These tool...

Страница 345: ...e the same general steps used for y x functions as described in Basic Function Graphing Any differences that apply to parametric equations are described on the following pages Graping Parametic Equations Graping Parametic Equations Graping Parametic Equations Graping Parametic Equations 1 Set Graph mode 3 to PARAMETRIC Also set Angle mode if necessary 2 Define x and y components on Y Editor 8 3 Se...

Страница 346: ...t by tracing a parametric equation Use the Zoom toolbar menu to zoom in or out on a portion of the graph 4 Set the display style for an equation You can set either the x or y component ˆ This is optional For multiple equations this helps visually distinguish one from another 5 Define the viewing window 8 Zoom also changes the viewing window 6 Change the graph format if necessary ƒ 9 or 8 F 7 Graph...

Страница 347: ...h Mode Setting the Graph Mode Setting the Graph Mode Use 3 to set Graph PARAMETRIC before you define equations or set Window variables The Y Editor and the Window Editor let you enter information for the current Graph mode setting only Defining Parametric Equations on the Y Editor Defining Parametric Equations on the Y Editor Defining Parametric Equations on the Y Editor Defining Parametric Equati...

Страница 348: ...define a set of x and y components When you return to FUNCTION graphing mode your y x functions are still defined in the Y Editor When you return to PARAMETRIC graphing mode your x and y components are still defined Selecting Parametric Equations Selecting Parametric Equations Selecting Parametric Equations Selecting Parametric Equations To graph a parametric equation select either its x or y comp...

Страница 349: ...tically sets the y component to Dot Note Use the Animate and Path styles for interesting projectile motion effects The Above and Below styles are not available for parametric equations and are dimmed on the Y Editor s Style toolbar menu Window Variables Window Variables Window Variables Window Variables The Window Editor maintains an independent set of Window variables for each Graph mode setting ...

Страница 350: ...aphing you can explore a graph by using the following tools tstep Increment for the t value Parametric equations are evaluated at x tmin y tmin x tmin tstep y tmin tstep x tmin 2 tstep y tmin 2 tstep not to exceed not to exceed x tmax y tmax xmin xmax ymin ymax Boundaries of the viewing window xscl yscl Distance between tick marks on the x and y axes tmin 0 xmin L10 ymin L10 tmax 2p 6 2831853 radi...

Страница 351: ...ffected The t Window variables tmin tmax tstep are not affected unless you select 6 ZoomStd which sets tmin 0 tmax 2p and tstep p 24 Trace Lets you move the cursor along a graph one tstep at a time When you begin a trace the cursor is on the first selected parametric equation at tmin QuickCenter applies to all directions If you move the cursor off the screen top or bottom left or right press to ce...

Страница 352: ...A Tangent and B Arc are available for parametric graphs These tools are based on t values For example 1 Value displays x and y values for a specified t value 6 Derivatives finds dy dx dy dt or dx dt at a point defined for a specified t value Tool For Parametric Graphs ...

Страница 353: ...ons as described in Basic Function Graphing Any differences are described on the following pages Graphing Sequences Graphing Sequences Graphing Sequences Graphing Sequences 1 Set Graph mode 3 to SEQUENCE Also set Angle mode if necessary 2 Define sequences and if needed initial values on Y Editor 8 3 Select which defined sequences to graph Do not select initial values Note To turn off any stat data...

Страница 354: ...oom toolbar menu to zoom in or out on a portion of the graph Use the Math toolbar menu to evaluate a sequence Only 1 Value is available for sequences Plot sequences on Time the default Web or Custom axes Note You can also evaluate a sequence while tracing Simply enter the n value directly from the keyboard 5 Define the viewing window 8 Zoom also changes the viewing window 6 Change the graph format...

Страница 355: ...e Use 3 to set Graph SEQUENCE before you define sequences or set Window variables The Y Editor and the Window Editor let you enter information for the current Graph mode setting only Defining Sequences on the Y Editor Defining Sequences on the Y Editor Defining Sequences on the Y Editor Defining Sequences on the Y Editor If a sequence requires more than one initial value enter them as a list enclo...

Страница 356: ...aphing mode you define a set of y x functions You change to SEQUENCE graphing mode and define a set of u n sequences When you return to FUNCTION graphing mode your y x functions are still defined in the Y Editor When you return to SEQUENCE graphing mode your u n sequences are still defined Note You can use the Define command from the Home screen see Technical Reference to define functions and equa...

Страница 357: ...nces are evaluated even if they are not plotted With CUSTOM axes when you specify a sequence in the custom settings it is graphed regardless of whether it is selected Selecting the Display Style Selecting the Display Style Selecting the Display Style Selecting the Display Style Only the Line Dot Square and Thick styles are available for sequence graphs Dot and Square mark only those discrete integ...

Страница 358: ...in nmax Smallest and largest n values to evaluate Sequences are evaluated at u nmin u nmin 1 u nmin 2 not to exceed u nmax plotStrt The term number that will be the first one plotted depending on plotstep For example to begin plotting with the 2nd term in the sequence set plotstrt 2 The first term will be evaluated at nmin but not plotted plotStep Incremental n value for graphing only This does no...

Страница 359: ...ent points are plotted To see how plotstrt affects graph look at the following examples of a recursive sequence Note Both of these graphs use the same Window variables except for plotstrt nmin 1 nmax 10 plotstrt 1 plotstep 1 xmin L10 xmax 10 xscl 1 ymin L10 ymax 10 yscl 1 This graph is plotted beginning with the 1st term This graph is plotted beginning with the 9th term plotStrt 1 plotStrt 9 ...

Страница 360: ...OM axes multiple sequences are always plotted simultaneously With WEB axes multiple sequences are always plotted sequentially Exploring a Graph Exploring a Graph Exploring a Graph Exploring a Graph As in function graphing you can explore a graph by using the following tools Any displayed coordinates are shown in rectangular or polar form as set in the graph format You could set xmin first n value ...

Страница 361: ...e approximately ten plotted points at a time press 2 B or 2 A When you begin a trace the cursor is on the first selected sequence at the term number specified by plotstrt even if it is outside the viewing window QuickCenter applies to all directions If you move the cursor off the screen top or bottom left or right press to center the viewing window on the cursor location With WEB axes the trace cu...

Страница 362: ...s of axes for the graph Examples of the different types are given later in this module Displaying the AXES Dialog Box Displaying the AXES Dialog Box Displaying the AXES Dialog Box Displaying the AXES Dialog Box From the Y Editor Axes Depending on the current Axes setting some items may be dimmed To exit without making any changes press N Item Description Axes TIME Plots u n on the y axis and n on ...

Страница 363: ...lots Valid Functions for Web Plots Valid Functions for Web Plots A sequence must meet the following criteria otherwise it will not be graphed properly on WEB axes The sequence Must be recursive with only one recursion level u nN1 but not u nN2 Cannot reference n directly Cannot reference any other defined sequence except itself When You Display the Graph Screen When You Display the Graph Screen Wh...

Страница 364: ... the sequence is plotted the web may be displayed manually or automatically depending on how you set Build Web on the AXES dialog box The web 1 Starts on the x axis at the initial value ui when plotstrt 1 2 Moves vertically either up or down to the sequence If Build Web The web is TRACE Not drawn until you press The web is then drawn step by step as you move the trace cursor you must have an initi...

Страница 365: ...ep is ignored Example Convergence Example Convergence Example Convergence Example Convergence 1 On the Y Editor 8 define u1 n L 8u1 nN1 3 6 Set initial value ui1 L4 2 Set Axes TIME 3 On the Window Editor 8 set the Window variables 5 On the Y Editor set Axes WEB and Build Web AUTO nmin 1 nmax 25 plotstrt 1 plotstep 1 xmin 0 xmax 25 xscl 1 ymin L10 ymax 10 yscl 1 4 Graph the sequence 8 By default a ...

Страница 366: ...c approach the convergence point Note When the nc value changes the cursor is on the sequence The next time you press B nc stays the same but the cursor is now on the y x reference line nmin 1 nmax 25 plotstrt 1 plotstep 1 xmin L10 xmax 10 xscl 1 ymin L10 ymax 10 yscl 1 7 Regraph the sequence Web plots are always shown as lines regardless of the selected display style Note During a trace you can m...

Страница 367: ...r 8 set the Window variables 5 On the Y Editor set Axes WEB and Build Web AUTO 6 On the Window Editor 8 set the Window variables nmin 0 nmax 10 plotstrt 1 plotstep 1 xmin 0 xmax 10 xscl 1 ymin L75 ymax 10 yscl 1 4 Graph the sequence 8 Because the sequence quickly diverges to large negative values only a few points are plotted nmin 0 nmax 10 plotstrt 1 plotstep 1 xmin L10 xmax 10 xscl 1 ymin L10 ym...

Страница 368: ...al value ui1 0 5 2 Set Axes TIME 3 On the Window Editor 8 set the Window variables 5 On the Y Editor set Axes WEB and Build Web AUTO 7 Regraph the sequence The web plot shows how quickly the sequence diverges to large negative values nmin 1 nmax 100 plotstrt 1 plotstep 1 xmin 0 xmax 100 xscl 10 ymin 0 ymax 5 yscl 1 4 Graph the sequence 8 Note Compare this graph with the divergence example This is ...

Страница 369: ...n graphing sequences As shown in the following example CUSTOM axes are particularly effective for showing relationships between one sequence and another nmin 1 nmax 100 plotstrt 1 plotstep 1 xmin 2 68 xmax 6 47 xscl 1 ymin 4 7 ymax 47 yscl 1 7 Regraph the sequence Note The web moves to an orbit oscillating between two stable points 9 On the Window Editor set plotstrt 50 Then regraph the sequence N...

Страница 370: ...r 8 define the sequences and initial values for Rn and Wn u1 n u1 nN1 1 05 N 001 u2 nN1 ui1 200 u2 n u2 nN1 1 0002 u1 nN1 N 03 ui2 50 Note Assume there are initially 200 rabbits and 50 foxes 2 Set Axes TIME R Number of rabbits M Growth rate of rabbits if there are no foxes use 05 K Rate at which foxes can kill rabbits use 001 W Number of foxes G Growth rate of foxes if there are rabbits use 0002 D...

Страница 371: ...trt 1 plotstep 1 xmin 0 xmax 400 xscl 100 ymin 0 ymax 300 yscl 100 4 Graph the sequence 8 Note Use to individually trace the number of rabbits u1 n and foxes u2 n over time n nmin 0 nmax 400 plotstrt 1 plotstep 1 xmin 84 xmax 237 xscl 50 ymin 25 ymax 75 yscl 10 7 Regraph the sequence Note Use to trace both the number of rabbits xc and foxes yc over the cycle of 400 generations u n u1 n u2 n u2 n u...

Страница 372: ...d information Example Fibonacci Sequence Example Fibonacci Sequence Example Fibonacci Sequence Example Fibonacci Sequence In a Fibonacci sequence the first two terms are 1 and 1 Each succeeding term is the sum of the two immediately preceding terms 1 On the Y Editor 8 define the sequence and set the initial values as shown 2 Set table parameters 8 to tblStart 1 tbl 1 Independent AUTO You must ente...

Страница 373: ...uence Graphing 373 3 Set Window variables 8 so that nmin has the same value as tblStart 4 Display the table 8 5 Scroll down the table D or 2 D to see more of the sequence Fibonacci sequence is in column 2 ...

Страница 374: ...nction Graphing Any differences that apply to 3D equations are described on the following pages Graphing 3D Equations Graphing 3D Equations Graphing 3D Equations Graphing 3D Equations 1 Set Graph mode 3 to 3D Also set Angle mode if necessary 2 Define 3D equations on Y Editor 8 3 Select which equation to graph You can select only one 3D equation To turn off any stat data plots press 5 or use to des...

Страница 375: ...ot available for 3D graphs Use the Math toolbar menu to evaluate the equation at a specified point Only 1 Value is available for 3D graphs You can also evaluate z x y while tracing Type the x value and press then type the y value and press 5 Change the graph format if necessary ƒ 9 or 8 F Note To help you see the orientation of 3D graphs turn on Axes and Labels 6 Graph the selected equations 8 Not...

Страница 376: ...ng the Graph Mode Use 3 to set Graph 3D before you define equations or set Window variables The Y Editor and the Window Editor let you enter information for the current Graph mode setting only Defining 3D Equations on the Y Editor Defining 3D Equations on the Y Editor Defining 3D Equations on the Y Editor Defining 3D Equations on the Y Editor The Y Editor maintains an independent function list for...

Страница 377: ...he Display Style Selecting the Display Style Because you can graph only one 3D equation at a time display styles are not available On the Y Editor the Style toolbar menu is dimmed For 3D equations however you can use ƒ 9 or 8 F to set the Style format to WIRE FRAME or HIDDEN SURFACE Window Variables Window Variables Window Variables Window Variables The Window Editor maintains an independent set o...

Страница 378: ...t where the grid lines or grid wires intersect The incremental value along x and y is calculated as x increment y increment The number of grid wires is xgrid 1 and ygrid 1 For example when xgrid 14 and ygrid 14 the xy grid consists of 225 15 15 grid points ncontour The number of contours evenly distributed along the displayed range of z values Variable Description xmax xmin xgrid ymax ymin ygrid z...

Страница 379: ...d variables decreases the graphing speed Setting the Graph Format Setting the Graph Format Setting the Graph Format Setting the Graph Format The Axes and Style formats are specific to the 3D graphing mode Exploring a Graph Exploring a Graph Exploring a Graph Exploring a Graph As in function graphing you can explore a graph by using the following tools Any displayed coordinates are shown in rectang...

Страница 380: ...affected The grid xgrid ygrid and eye eyeq eyef eyeψ Window variables are not affected unless you select 6 ZoomStd which resets these variables to their standard values Trace Lets you move the cursor along a grid wire from one grid point to the next on the 3D surface When you begin a trace the cursor appears at the midpoint of the xy grid QuickCenter is available At any time during a trace regardl...

Страница 381: ... the x and y axes have a different orientation than other graphing modes How to Move the Cursor How to Move the Cursor How to Move the Cursor How to Move the Cursor On a 3D surface the cursor always follows along a grid wire Math Only 1 Value is available for 3D graphs This tool displays the z value for a specified x and y value After selecting 1 Value type the x value and press Then type the y va...

Страница 382: ...een use 8 F Simple Example of Moving the Cursor Simple Example of Moving the Cursor Simple Example of Moving the Cursor Simple Example of Moving the Cursor The following graph shows a sloped plane that has the equation z1 x y M x y 2 Suppose you want to trace around the displayed boundary In 2D graphing the x and y axes always have the same orientation relative to the Graph screen In 3D graphing x...

Страница 383: ...l to the axes Example of the Cursor on a Hidden Surface Example of the Cursor on a Hidden Surface Example of the Cursor on a Hidden Surface Example of the Cursor on a Hidden Surface On more complex shapes the cursor may appear as if it is not on a grid point This is an optical illusion caused when the cursor is on a hidden surface D moves in a negative y direction back to ymin B moves in a positiv...

Страница 384: ...r Example of an Off the Curve Cursor Example of an Off the Curve Cursor Example of an Off the Curve Cursor Although the cursor can move only along a grid wire you will see many cases where the cursor does not appear to be on the 3D surface at all This occurs when the z axis is too short to show z x y for the corresponding x and y values You can move the cursor so that it does not appear to be on a...

Страница 385: ... on the cursor s location Simply press When zc is outside the z boundary of the viewing cube the cursor is physically displayed at zmin or zmax although the screen shows the correct trace coordinates Rotating and or Elevating the Viewing Angle Rotating and or Elevating the Viewing Angle Rotating and or Elevating the Viewing Angle Rotating and or Elevating the Viewing Angle In 3D graphing mode the ...

Страница 386: ...se and is horizontal In the Window Editor 8 always enter eyeq eyef and eyeψ in degrees regardless of the current angle mode The viewing angle has three components eyeq angle in degrees from the positive x axis eyef angle in degrees from the positive z axis eyeψ angle in degrees by which the graph is rotated counter clockwise around the line of sight set by eyeq and eyef Y Z X eyeq eyef eye Do not ...

Страница 387: ...ng eyeq theta theta theta theta The view on the Graph screen is always oriented along the viewing angle From this point of view you can change eyeq to rotate the viewing angle around the z axis Note This example increments eyeq by 30 z1 x y x3 y y3 x 390 In this example eyef 70 eyeq 20 eyeq 50 eyeq 80 ...

Страница 388: ...plane Note This example starts on the xy plane eyef 90 and decrements eyef by 20 to elevate the viewing angle Effect of Changing eye Effect of Changing eye Effect of Changing eye Effect of Changing eyeψ psi psi psi psi The view on the Graph screen is always oriented along the viewing angles set by eyeq and eyef You can change eyeψ to rotate the graph around that line of sight z1 x y x3 y y3 x 390 ...

Страница 389: ...en s width and height This causes some distortion as shown in the example z1 x y x3 y y3 x 390 In this example eyeq 20 and eyef 70 eyeψ 0 eyeψ 45 eyeψ 90 When eyeψ 0 the z axis runs the height of the screen When eyeψ 90 the z axis runs the width of the screen z 10 z ë10 z 10 z ë10 ...

Страница 390: ... necessary Animating a 3D Graph Interactively Animating a 3D Graph Interactively Animating a 3D Graph Interactively Animating a 3D Graph Interactively After plotting any 3D graph you can change the viewing angle interactively by using the cursor The Viewing Orbit The Viewing Orbit The Viewing Orbit The Viewing Orbit When using A and B to animate a graph think of it as moving the viewing angle alon...

Страница 391: ...se the cursor quickly Move along the viewing orbit A or B Change the viewing orbit s elevation primarily increases or decreases eyef C or D Animate the graph continuously Press and hold the cursor for about 1 second and then release it To stop press N or the space bar Change between 4 animation speeds increase or decrease the incremental changes in the eye Window variables Press or Change the view...

Страница 392: ...ures Refer to Animating a Series of Graph Pictures Additonal Graphing Topics This method gives you more control over the Window variable values particularly eyeψ which rotates the graph Changing the Axes and Style Formats Changing the Axes and Style Formats Changing the Axes and Style Formats Changing the Axes and Style Formats With its default settings Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator displays hidd...

Страница 393: ...ases the origin 0 0 0 is inside the box not at a corner For example if xmin ymin zmin L10 and xmax ymax zmax 10 the origin is at the center of the box The dialog box shows the current graph format settings To exit without making a change press N To display the valid Axes settings highlight the current setting and press B AXES Shows standard xyz axes BOX Shows 3 dimensional box axes The edges of th...

Страница 394: ...ssible Optical Illusions Be Aware of Possible Optical Illusions Be Aware of Possible Optical Illusions Be Aware of Possible Optical Illusions The eye angles used to view a graph eyeq eyef and eyeψ Window variables can result in optical illusions that cause you to lose perspective on a graph Typically most optical illusions occur when the eye angles are in a negative quadrant of the coordinate syst...

Страница 395: ...reen to show the front of the box To minimize the effect of optical illusions use the GRAPH FORMATS dialog box to set Style HIDDEN SURFACE Contour Plots Contour Plots Contour Plots Contour Plots In a contour plot a line is drawn to connect adjacent points on the 3D graph that have the same z value This module discusses the CONTOUR LEVELS and WIRE AND CONTOUR graph format styles Looking down from a...

Страница 396: ... so that you are viewing the contours by looking down the z axis You can change the viewing angle as necessary The graph is shown in expanded view To switch between expanded and normal view press p The Labels format is set to OFF automatically For WIRE AND CONTOUR the contours are drawn on a wire frame view The viewing angle view expanded or normal and Labels format retain their previous settings ...

Страница 397: ...ariable values as a ZoomStd viewing cube If you use ZoomStd press Z to look down the z axis Do not confuse the contours with the grid lines The contours are darker Style z1 x y x3 y y3 x 390 z1 x y x2 5y2 5 Looking down z axis CONTOUR LEVELS Using eyeq 20 eyef 70 eyeψ 0 CONTOUR LEVELS WIRE AND CONTOUR ...

Страница 398: ...f z values where If ncontour 5 and you use the standard viewing window zmin L10 and zmax 10 the increment is 3 333 Five contours are drawn for z L6 666 L3 333 0 3 333 and 6 666 Note however that a contour is not drawn for a z value if the 3D graph is not defined at that z value increment The z values for the contours are zmin increment zmin 2 increment zmin 3 increment zmin ncontour increment zmax...

Страница 399: ...cify a point on the graph and draw a contour for the corresponding z value 2 Select 7 Draw Contour 3 Either Type the point s x value and press and then type the y value and press or Move the cursor to the applicable point The cursor moves along the grid lines Then press For example suppose the current graph is z1 x y x2 5y2 5 If you specify x 2 and y 3 a contour is drawn for z 3 5 Note Any existin...

Страница 400: ...tours are drawn on the current 3D graph A contour is not drawn if the specified z value is outside the viewing cube or if the 3D graph is not defined at that z value Notes about Contour Plots Notes about Contour Plots Notes about Contour Plots Notes about Contour Plots For a contour plot You can use the cursor keys to animate the contour plot You cannot trace the contours themselves However you ca...

Страница 401: ...dulus Surface Example Contours of a Complex Modulus Surface Example Contours of a Complex Modulus Surface Example Contours of a Complex Modulus Surface The complex modulus surface given by z a b abs f a bi shows all the complex zeros of any polynomial y f x Example Example Example Example In this example let f x x3 1 By substituting the general complex form x yi for x you can express the complex s...

Страница 402: ... and i 4 Display the Graph Formats dialog box 8 F Turn on the axes set Style CONTOUR LEVELS and return to the Window editor 6 Press and move the trace cursor to the zero in the fourth quadrant The coordinates let you estimate 428 857i as the zero 7 Press N Then use the cursor keys to animate the graph and view it from different eye angles This example shows eyeq 70 eyef 70 and eyeψ 0 1 1 2 3 2 1 2...

Страница 403: ...cit forms that cannot be graphed in function graphing mode Technically an implicit plot is a 3D contour plot with a single contour drawn for z 0 only Explicit and Implicit Forms Explicit and Implicit Forms Explicit and Implicit Forms Explicit and Implicit Forms In 2D function graphing mode equations have an explicit form y f x where y is unique for each value of x Many equations however have an im...

Страница 404: ...e Selecting the Graph Format Style In 3D graphing mode define an appropriate equation and graph it as you would any 3D equation with the following exception Display the GRAPH FORMATS dialog box from Rearrange the implicit form as an equation set to zero f x y g x y 0 In the Y Editor enter the non zero side of the equation This is valid because an implicit plot automatically sets the equation equal...

Страница 405: ...8 F The viewing angle is set initially so that you are viewing the plot by looking down the z axis You can change the viewing angle as necessary The plot is shown in expanded view To switch between expanded and normal view press p The Labels format is set to OFF automatically and then set Style IMPLICIT PLOT Style x2 y2 4 z1 x y x2 y2 4 sin x cos y e xùy z1 x y sin x cos y e xùy IMPLICIT PLOT ...

Страница 406: ...een wire frame graph of the 3D equation It may take awhile to evaluate the equation initially Because of possible long evaluation times you first may want to experiment with your 3D equation by using Style WIRE FRAME The evaluation time is much shorter Then after you re sure you have the correct Window variable values set Style IMPLICIT PLOT 8 F Example Implicit Plot of a More Complicated Example ...

Страница 407: ...ess 8 and define the equation z1 x y sin x 4 y x 3y 1 3 Press 8 and set the Window variables as shown 4 Press 8 F Turn on the axes set Style IMPLICIT PLOT and return to the Window editor 5 Press 8 to graph the equation It will take awhile to evaluate the graph so be patient The graph shows where sin x4 y x3 y 1 ...

Страница 408: ...tween normal and expanded views 6 Use the cursor keys to animate the graph and view it from different eye angles Note For more detail increase the xgrid and ygrid Window variables However this increases the graph evaluation time In expanded view this example shows eyeq L127 85 eyef 52 86 and eyeψ L18 26 ...

Страница 409: ... Equations To graph differential equations use the same general steps used for y x functions as described in Basic Function Graphing Any differences are described on the following pages Graphing Differential Equations Graphing Differential Equations Graphing Differential Equations Graphing Differential Equations 1 Set Graph mode 3 to DIFF EQUATIONS Also set Angle mode if necessary 2 Define equatio...

Страница 410: ... 9 or H 8 F Note The Fields format is critical depending on the order of the equation 6 Set the axes as applicable depending on the Fields format H Note Valid Axes settings depend on the Fields format 7 Define the viewing window 8 Note Depending on the Solution Method and Fields formats different Window variables are displayed Zoom also changes the viewing window ...

Страница 411: ...Graph Mode Use 3 to set Graph DIFF EQUATIONS before you define differential equations or set Window variables The Y Editor and the Window Editor let you enter information for the current Graph mode setting only Defining Differential Equations on the Y Editor Defining Differential Equations on the Y Editor Defining Differential Equations on the Y Editor Defining Differential Equations on the Y Edit...

Страница 412: ...equations Detailed information is available on setting initial conditions Selecting Differential Equations Selecting Differential Equations Selecting Differential Equations Selecting Differential Equations Important Selecting y1 will graph the y1 solution curve not the derivative y1 depending on the axis setting Enter y1 001y1ù 100Ny1 Not y1 001y1 t ù 100Ny1 t Do not use implied multiplication bet...

Страница 413: ...g Graph Formats Setting Graph Formats Setting Graph Formats The formats affected by differential equations are From the Y Editor Window Editor or Graph screen press 9 or H 8 F Graph format Description Graph Order Not available Solution Method Specifies the method used to solve the differential equations RK Runge Kutta method For information about the algorithm used for this method refer to the Tec...

Страница 414: ...mat Fields Specifies whether to draw a field for the differential equation SLPFLD Draws a slope field for only one 1st order equation with t on the x axis and the solution on the y axis DIRFLD Draws a direction field for only one 2nd order equation or system of two 1st order equations with axes determined by the custom axes settings FLDOFF Does not display a field This is valid for equations of an...

Страница 415: ...he solutions to the selected differential equations on the y axis CUSTOM Lets you select the x and y axes Variable Description t0 Time at which the initial conditions entered in the Y Editor occur You can set t0 in the Window Editor and Y Editor If you set t0 in the Y Editor tplot is set to the same value automatically tmax tstep Used to determine the t values where the equations are plotted y t0 ...

Страница 416: ...starting at t0 may not be interesting visually By setting tplot greater than t0 you can start the plot at the interesting area which speeds up the graphing time and avoids unnecessary clutter on the Graph screen Variable Description xmin xmax ymin ymax Boundaries of the viewing window xscl yscl Distance between tick marks on the x and y axes ncurves Number of solution curves 0 through 10 that will...

Страница 417: ...d by the RK method to help select a step size for solving the equation must be 1EL14 fldres Fields SLPFLD or DIRFLD only Number of columns 1 through 80 used to draw a slope or direction field across the full width of the screen Estep Solution Method EULER only Euler iterations between tstep values must be an integer 0 For more accuracy you can increase Estep without plotting additional points dtim...

Страница 418: ...re of the field is stored automatically to a system variable named fldpic If you perform an operation that regraphs the plotted equations but does not affect the field the Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator reuses the picture in fldpic instead of having to redraw the field This can speed up the regraphing time significantly fldpic is deleted automatically when you exit the differential equation graphi...

Страница 419: ...les t0 tmax tstep tplot are not affected unless you select 6 ZoomStd which sets all Window variables to their standard values Trace Lets you move the cursor along the curve one tstep at a time To move approximately ten plotted points at a time press 2 B or 2 A If you enter initial conditions in the Y Editor or let the ncurves Window variable plot curves automatically you can trace the curves If yo...

Страница 420: ...s Setting the Initial Conditions Setting the Initial Conditions You can enter initial conditions in the Y Editor let the Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator calculate initial conditions automatically or select them interactively from the Graph screen Math Only 1 Value is available With TIME axes the y t solution value represented by yc is displayed for a specified t value With CUSTOM axes the values th...

Страница 421: ...Enter an Initial Condition in the Y Editor If You Do Not Enter an Initial Condition in the Y Editor If You Do Not Enter an Initial Condition in the Y Editor If you do not enter initial conditions the ncurves Window variable 8 specifies the number of solution curves graphed automatically By default ncurves 0 You can To enter initial conditions for the y1 equation use the yi1 line etc If you enter i...

Страница 422: ...ditor is not changed Notes Without entering initial conditions use SLPFLD with ncurves 0 or DIRFLD to display a slope or direction field only SLPFLD is for a single 1st order equation only DIRFLD is for a 2nd order equation or system of two 1st order equations only If Fields Then SLPFLD Uses ncurves if not set to 0 to graph curves DIRFLD Ignores ncurves Does not graph any curves FLDOFF Uses ncurve...

Страница 423: ...curve is displayed you can select a point on the Graph screen and use it as an initial condition If Fields Do this SLPFLD or DIRFLD Press H Š Specify an initial condition Either Move the cursor to the applicable point and press or For each of the two coordinates type a value and press For SLPFLD 1st order only enter values for t0 and y t0 For DIRFLD 2nd order or system of two 1st order equations o...

Страница 424: ...olution Curve Note about Tracing a Solution Curve Note about Tracing a Solution Curve When you enter initial conditions in the Y Editor or let ncurves graph solution curves automatically you can use to trace the curves However you cannot trace a curve drawn by selecting an initial condition interactively These curves are drawn not plotted FLDOFF Press H Š You are prompted to select the axes for wh...

Страница 425: ... a 1st Order System Transforming an Equation into a 1st Order System Transforming an Equation into a 1st Order System Transforming an Equation into a 1st Order System A system of equations can be defined in various ways but the following is a general method 1 Rewrite the original differential equation as necessary a Solve for the highest ordered derivative b Express it in terms of y and t c On the...

Страница 426: ...ft side of the equation substitute for the derivative value as shown below In place of Substitute y y y y y 4 y1 y2 y3 y4 y5 y et N y2 N y1 Do not substitute on the left side at this time In place of Substitute y y y y 4 y1 y2 y3 y4 y2 et N y2 N y1 ...

Страница 427: ...t to deselect any other equations in the system Example of a 2nd Order Equation Example of a 2nd Order Equation Example of a 2nd Order Equation Example of a 2nd Order Equation The 2nd order differential equation y y 0 represents a simple harmonic oscillator Transform this into a system of equations for the Y Editor Then graph the solution for initial conditions y 0 0 and y 0 1 2 On the applicable ...

Страница 428: ...er the system of equations 4 Enter the initial conditions yi1 0 and yi2 1 Note t0 is the time at which the initial conditions occur It is also the first t evaluated for the graph By default t0 0 5 Press 9 or H 8 F and set Axes ON Labels OFF Solution Method RK and Fields DIRFLD Important For 2nd order equations you must set Fields DIRFLD or FLDOFF y y 0 y Ly y Ly1 y2 Ly1 yi1 is the initial conditio...

Страница 429: ...s H and make sure Axes CUSTOM with y1 and y2 as the axes Important Fields DIRFLD cannot plot a time axis An Invalid Axes error occurs if Axes TIME or if t is set as a CUSTOM axis 7 In the Window Editor 8 set the Window variables t0 0 tmax 10 tstep 1 tplot 0 xmin L2 xmax 2 xscl 1 ymin L2 ymax 2 yscl 1 ncurves 0 diftol 001 fldres 14 dtime 0 8 Display the Graph screen 8 x axis y1 y y axis y2 y ...

Страница 430: ...play different graphs in both parts of a split screen you must use the 2 graph mode 10 Press 2 a to switch to the right side of the split screen 11 Use to select y1 and y2 The right side uses the same equations as the left side However no equations are selected initially in the right side 12 Press 9 or H 8 F Set Fields FLDOFF Important Because Fields DIRFLD cannot plot a time axis you must change ...

Страница 431: ...tial conditions y 0 0 y 0 1 and y 0 1 14 In the Window Editor change ymin and ymax as shown to the right Note When you enter 2 graph mode Window variables for the right side are set to their defaults ymin L2 ymax 2 15 Press 8 to display the Graph screen for graph 2 The left side shows the phase plane orbit The right side shows the solution curve and its derivative 16 To return to a full screen of ...

Страница 432: ... sin x y sin x N 2y N 2y N y y sin t N 2y N 2y N y y sin t N 2y3 N 2y2 N y1 y3 sin t N 2y3 N 2y2 N y1 3 In the Y Editor 8 enter the system of equations 4 Enter the initial conditions yi1 0 yi2 1 and yi3 1 Note t0 is the time at which the initial conditions occur By default t0 0 5 Be sure that only y1 is selected Use to deselect any other equations Important The solution to the y1 equation is the s...

Страница 433: ...s you must set Fields FLDOFF Otherwise an Undefined variable error occurs when graphing 7 In the Y Editor press H Set Axes TIME Note With Axes TIME the solution to the selected equation is plotted against time t 8 In the Window Editor 8 set the Window variables t0 0 tmax 10 tstep 1 tplot 0 xmin L1 xmax 10 xscl 1 ymin L3 ymax 3 yscl 1 ncurves 0 diftol 001 ...

Страница 434: ...effective for showing different kinds of relationships Displaying the AXES Dialog Box Displaying the AXES Dialog Box Displaying the AXES Dialog Box Displaying the AXES Dialog Box From the Y Editor press H 9 Display the Graph screen 8 Note To find the solution at a particular time use to trace the graph If Fields SLPFLD Axes is unavailable H Item Description Axes TIME Plots t on the x axis and y so...

Страница 435: ...tion equilibrium in a certain region Graph the solution using both time and custom axes X Axis Y Axis Active only when Axes CUSTOM these let you select what you want to plot on the x and y axes t time y solutions y1 y2 etc of all selected differential equations y values of all selected differential equations y1 y2 etc y1 y2 etc the solution to the corresponding differential equation regardless of ...

Страница 436: ...Ny1 ùy2 where y1 Population of foxes yi1 Initial population of foxes 2 y2 Population of rabbits yi2 Initial population of rabbits 5 1 Use 3 to set Graph DIFF EQUATIONS 2 In the Y Editor 8 define the differential equations and enter the initial conditions Note To speed up graphing times clear any other equations in the Y Editor With FLDOFF all equations are evaluated even if they are not selected ...

Страница 437: ...els ON Solution Method RK and Fields FLDOFF 4 In the Y Editor press H Set Axes TIME 5 In the Window Editor 8 set the Window variables t0 0 tmax 10 tstep p 24 tplot 0 xmin L1 xmax 10 xscl 5 ymin L10 ymax 40 yscl 5 ncurves 0 diftol 001 6 Graph the differential equations 8 ...

Страница 438: ...rves for y1 and y2 8 Return to the Y Editor Press 9 or H 8 F Set Fields DIRFLD Note In this example DIRFLD is used for two related differential equations that do not represent a 2nd order equation 9 Press H Confirm that the axes are set as shown 10 In the Y Editor clear the initial conditions for yi1 and yi2 11 Return to the Graph screen which displays only the direction field y2 t y1 t ...

Страница 439: ... plot those points along with a graph of the equation s exact solution 12 To graph a family of solutions return to the Y Editor and enter the initial conditions shown below yi1 2 6 7 and yi2 5 12 18 Note Use a list to specify more than one initial condition 13 Return to the Graph screen which displays a curve for each pair of initial conditions 14 Press to trace Then press 3 to see the number of f...

Страница 440: ...Enter the initial condition yi1 10 5 Press 9 or H 8 F Set Solution Method RK and Fields FLDOFF Note To speed up graphing times clear any other equations in the Y Editor With FLDOFF all equations are evaluated even if they are not selected Do not use implied multiplication between the variable and parentheses If you do it is treated as a function call t0 is the time at which the initial condition o...

Страница 441: ...ymin L10 ymax 10 yscl 1 ncurves 0 diftol 001 7 In the Home screen H 8 use BldData to create a data variable containing the RK graphing points 8 Return to the Y Editor press 9 or H 8 F Set Solution Method EULER Note You do not need to graph the equation before using BldData For more information about BldData refer to the Technical Reference module 9 Return to the Home screen and use BldData to crea...

Страница 442: ...as shown To define a column header move the cursor to that column press type the reference expression such as rklog 1 for c1 and press Note rklog 1 and rklog 2 refer to column 1 and 2 in rklog respectively Likewise with eulerlog 2 12 In the Data Matrix Editor press Then press and define Plot 1 for the RK data as shown to the right 13 Define Plot 2 for the Euler data Use the values shown to the rig...

Страница 443: ...1 and Plot 2 16 In the Window Editor set the Window variables xmin L10 xmax 100 xscl 10 ymin L10 ymax 120 yscl 10 xres 2 17 Display the Graph screen 8 Note The fuzzy line on the graph indicates differences between the RK and Euler values 18 In the Window Editor set the Window variables to zoom in so that you can examine the differences in more detail xmin 39 7 xmax 40 3 xscl 1 ymin 85 5 ymax 86 ys...

Страница 444: ...x Editor to open the errorlog data variable and scroll to time 40 Example of the deSolve Function Example of the deSolve Function Example of the deSolve Function Example of the deSolve Function The deSolve function lets you solve many 1st and 2nd order ordinary differential equations exactly 20 Press to trace and then press C or D until y1 is selected 1 shows in upper right corner Then enter 40 RK...

Страница 445: ...ing the logistic 1st order differential equation find the general solution for y with respect to t Notes For maximum accuracy use 1 1000 instead of 001 A floating point number can introduce round off errors This example does not involve graphing so you can use any Graph mode deSolve y 1 1000 yù 100Ny t y Do not use implied multiplication between the variable and parentheses If you do it will be tr...

Страница 446: ...ighlight the solution in the history area Then press to autopaste it into the entry line b Insert the Define instruction at the beginning of the line Then press Note Press 2 A to move to the beginning of the entry line 3 For an initial condition y 10 with t 0 use solve to find the 1 constant Note If you got a different constant 2 etc solve for that constant 1 represents a constant You may get a di...

Страница 447: ...ou correct the problem Many problems may be related to your Fields graph format setting Setting the Fields Graph Format Setting the Fields Graph Format Setting the Fields Graph Format Setting the Fields Graph Format What Order Equation Are You Graphing What Order Equation Are You Graphing What Order Equation Are You Graphing What Order Equation Are You Graphing 4 Evaluate the general solution y wi...

Страница 448: ...pplicable setting For a particular Fields setting check the following for information that applies to that setting 2nd order system of two 1st order equations DIRFLD or FLDOFF 3rd or higher order system of three or more 1st order equations FLDOFF Because Fields SLPFLD is the default setting a common error message is shown to the right If the equation is Valid Fields settings are ...

Страница 449: ...order equation You can enter mulNotele equations but only one at a time can be selected The selected equation must not refer to any other equation in the Y Editor For example If y1 y2 an Undefined variable error occurs when you graph In the Graph screen If the slope field is drawn but no solution curve is plotted specify an initial condition ...

Страница 450: ...ror occurs when you graph If you enter initial conditions in the Y Editor the equations referenced by the custom axes must have the same number of initial conditions Otherwise a Dimension error occurs when you graph With custom axes Set axes that are valid for your system of equations Do not select t for either axis Otherwise an Invalid axes error occurs when you graph The two axes must refer to d...

Страница 451: ...atically Notes With DIRFLD the equations referenced by the custom axes determine which equations are graphed regardless of which equations are selected in the Y Editor If your system of equations refers to t the direction field not the plotted curves is drawn with respect to one particular time which is set by the dtime Window variable In the Y Editor If you enter a 2nd or higher order equation en...

Страница 452: ...is is not t you must enter at least one initial condition for each equation in the Y Editor whether the equation is selected or not Otherwise a Diff Eq setup error occurs when you graph In the Graph screen If no curve is graphed set an initial condition If you did enter initial conditions in the Y Editor select ZoomFit H A A 1st order equation may look different with FLDOFF than with SLPFLD This i...

Страница 453: ...Differential Equation Graphing 453 ...

Страница 454: ...he table refer to the following pages Generating a Table Generating a Table Generating a Table Generating a Table 1 Set Graph mode and if necessary Angle mode 3 Note Tables are not available in 3D Graph mode 2 Define functions on Y Editor 8 3 Select which defined functions to display in the table Note For information on defining and selecting functions with the Y Editor refer to Basic Function Gra...

Страница 455: ...ariable you can zoom in or out on the table to see different levels of detail Change the cell width Edit selected functions Build or edit a manual table to show only specified values of the independent variable Setting Up the Table Parameters Setting Up the Table Parameters Setting Up the Table Parameters Setting Up the Table Parameters To set up the initial parameters for a table use the TABLE SE...

Страница 456: ...his specifies the starting value for the independent variable tbl If Independent AUTO and Graph Table OFF this specifies the incremental value for the independent variable tbl can be positive or negative but not zero Graph Table If Independent AUTO OFF The table is based on the values you enter for tblStart and tbl ON The table is based on the same independent variable values that are used to grap...

Страница 457: ...anging the Setup Parameters Changing the Setup Parameters Changing the Setup Parameters Changing the Setup Parameters From the TABLE SETUP dialog box Independent AUTO The Voyage 200 automatically generates a series of values for the independent variable based on tblStart tbl and Graph Table ASK Lets you build a table manually by entering specific values for the independent variable To generate tbl...

Страница 458: ...From the Home Screen or a Program You can set up a table s parameters from the Home screen or a program You can Store values directly to the system variables tblStart and tbl Refer to Storing and Recalling Variable Values in Operating the Calculator To change Do this tblStart or tbl Type the new value The existing value is erased when you start to type or Press A or B to remove the highlighting Th...

Страница 459: ... the Graph screen If Graph Table OFF the table is based on the values you entered for tblStart and tbl Before You Begin Before You Begin Before You Begin Before You Begin Define and select the applicable functions on the Y Editor This example uses y1 x x3Nx 3 Displaying the Table Screen Displaying the Table Screen Displaying the Table Screen Displaying the Table Screen To display the Table screen ...

Страница 460: ... When you scroll right or left the values of the independent variable are always visible along the left side of the screen To move the cursor Press One cell at a time D C B or A One page at a time 2 and then D C B or A First column shows values of the independent variable Header row shows names of independent variable x and selected functions y1 Entry line shows full value of highlighted cell Othe...

Страница 461: ...he number and press 4 Press to close the dialog box and update the table How Numbers Are Displayed in a Cell How Numbers Are Displayed in a Cell How Numbers Are Displayed in a Cell How Numbers Are Displayed in a Cell Whenever possible a number is shown according to the currently selected display modes Display Digits Exponential Format etc The number may be rounded as necessary However If a number ...

Страница 462: ...e cell is wide enough to show more Other settings similarly affect a displayed number Note To see a number in full precision highlight the cell and look at the entry line If cell width is Full Precision 3 6 9 12 1 2345678901 1 2 1 2346 1 23457 1 23457 L123456 78 L1 2E5 L123457 L123457 000005 5 EL6 000005 000005 1 2345678E19 1 2E19 1 2346E19 1 23457E19 L1 23456789012EL200 L1 2EL200 L1 2346EL200 Not...

Страница 463: ...on Editing a Selected Function From a table you can change a selected function without having to use the Y Editor 1 Move the cursor to any cell in the column for that function The table s header row shows the function names y1 etc 2 Press to move the cursor to the entry line where the function is displayed and highlighted Note You can use this feature to view a function without leaving the table 3...

Страница 464: ...og box Then make your changes Building a Manual Ask Table Building a Manual Ask Table Building a Manual Ask Table Building a Manual Ask Table If Independent ASK on the TABLE SETUP dialog box the Voyage 200 lets you build a table manually by entering specific values for the independent variable Displaying the Table Screen Displaying the Table Screen Displaying the Table Screen Displaying the Table ...

Страница 465: ...e cursor to highlight the cell you want to enter or edit If you start with a blank table you can enter a value in consecutive cells only row 1 row 2 etc You cannot skip cells row 1 row 3 If a cell in column 1 contains a value you can edit that value 2 Press to move the cursor to the entry line 3 Type a new value or expression or edit the existing value 4 Press to move the value to the table and up...

Страница 466: ...dent variable column 2 Press to move the cursor to the entry line 3 Type a series of values enclosed in braces and separated by commas For example You can also enter a list variable or an expression that evaluates to a list Note If the independent variable column contains existing values they are shown as a list which you can edit 4 Press to move the values into the independent variable column The...

Страница 467: ...le values entered in the table even those not currently displayed tbl nput is also used for an automatic table but it contains only the independent variable values that are currently displayed Before displaying a table you can store a list of values directly to the tbl nput system variable To Do this Insert a new row above a specified row Highlight a cell in the specified row and press H ˆ The new...

Страница 468: ...Tables 468 ...

Страница 469: ...ow matrix vector on the Home screen or as data points in a system data variable that can be opened in the Data Matrix Editor Collecting the Points Collecting the Points Collecting the Points Collecting the Points 1 Display the graph This example shows y1 x 5ùcos x 2 Display the coordinates or math results you want to collect 3 Save the information to the Home screen or the sysData variable 8 H Hom...

Страница 470: ... exists new data is appended to the end of any existing data Existing titles or column headers for the affected columns are cleared titles are replaced with the applicable titles for the new data The sysData variable can be cleared deleted etc just as any other data variable However it cannot be locked 8 D 8 H Displayed coordinates are added to the Home screen s history area but not the entry line...

Страница 471: ...create a function or expression on the Home screen and then decide to graph it You can copy an expression to the Y Editor or graph it directly from the Home screen without using the Y Editor What Is the Native Independent Variable What Is the Native Independent Variable What Is the Native Independent Variable What Is the Native Independent Variable On the Y Editor all functions must be defined in ...

Страница 472: ...een Press ƒ and select 5 Copy 2 Display the Y Editor highlight the desired function and press 3 Press ƒ and select 6 Paste Then press Note Instead of using ƒ 5 or ƒ 6 to copy and paste use 8 C copy or 8 V paste Store the expression to a Y function name Note To copy an expression from the Home screen s history area to the entry line use the auto paste feature or copy and paste Define command Define...

Страница 473: ...ored to a variable 1 Display the Y Editor highlight the desired function and press 2 Press 2 Type the variable name that contains the expression and press twice Important To recall a function variable such as f1 x type only f1 not the full function name 3 Press to save the recalled expression in the Y Editor s function list Note 2 is useful if an expression is stored to a variable or function that...

Страница 474: ...nds any functions selected on the Y Editor You can trace zoom or show and edit Graph expressions on the Table screen just the same as Y Editor functions Clearing the Graph Screen Clearing the Graph Screen Clearing the Graph Screen Clearing the Graph Screen Each time you execute Graph the new expression is added to the existing ones To clear the graphs A non native independent variable In PARAMETRI...

Страница 475: ...d Functions You can define a user defined function in terms of any independent variable For example and Graphing a Piecewise Defined Function Graphing a Piecewise Defined Function Graphing a Piecewise Defined Function Graphing a Piecewise Defined Function To graph a piecewise function you must first define the function by specifying boundaries and expressions for each piece The when function is ex...

Страница 476: ...sing the When Function Using the When Function To define a two piece function use the syntax when condition trueExpression falseExpression For example suppose you want to graph a function with two pieces For three or more pieces you can use nested when functions When Use expression x 0 Mx x 0 5 cos x In the Y Editor The function is pretty printed in this form Enter the function in this form ...

Страница 477: ...ion Using a Multi Statement User Defined Function Using a Multi Statement User Defined Function Using a Multi Statement User Defined Function For three or more pieces you may want to create a multi statement user defined function When Use expression x Mp 4 sin x x M p and x 0 2x 6 x 0 6 x2 In the Y Editor y1 x when x 0 when x M p 4ùsin x 2x 6 6Nx 2 This nested function is in effect when x 0 ...

Страница 478: ...uctures If ElseIf Return etc used in programming When creating the structure of a function it may be helpful to visualize it first in a block form Ê Func and EndFunc must begin and end the function When entering a multi statement function on the Y Editor or Home screen you must enter the entire function on a single line When Use expression x Mp 4 sin x x M p and x 0 2x 6 x 0 6 x2 Ê Ê Func If x M p...

Страница 479: ...ned function For example use the Program Editor to create a function named f1 xx In the Y Editor set y1 x f1 x Graphing a Family of Curves Graphing a Family of Curves Graphing a Family of Curves Graphing a Family of Curves By entering a list in an expression you can plot a separate function for each value in the list You cannot graph a family of curves in SEQUENCE or 3D graphing mode In the Y Edit...

Страница 480: ...rate them with commas Enter the expression 2 4 6 sin 1 2 3 x and graph the functions Note The commas are shown in the entry line but not in the function list Example Using the Graph Command Example Using the Graph Command Example Using the Graph Command Example Using the Graph Command Similarly you can use the Graph command from the Home screen or a program Graphs three functions 2 sin x 4 sin x 6...

Страница 481: ...re graphed sequentially Note To set graph formats from the Y Editor Window Editor or Graph screen press 8 F When Tracing a Family of Curves When Tracing a Family of Curves When Tracing a Family of Curves When Tracing a Family of Curves Pressing D or C moves the trace cursor to the next or previous curve in the same family before moving to the next or previous selected function For these example fu...

Страница 482: ...creen mode For more information about split screens refer to Split Screens Setting the Mode Setting the Mode Setting the Mode Setting the Mode Several mode settings affect the two graph mode but only two settings are required Both are on Page 2 of the MODE dialog box 1 Press 3 Then press to display Page 2 3 Optionally you can set the following modes 2 Set the following required modes Split Screen ...

Страница 483: ...egular split screen Page 2 Split 1 App application for top or left side Split 2 App application for bottom or right side Graph 2 Graph mode for bottom or right side Split Screen Ratio relative sizes of the two sides Voyage 200 only Graph 2 right or bottom side Graph mode of active graph Graph 1 left or top side Thick border indicates active graph side Active graph side GR 1 or GR 2 ...

Страница 484: ...es Table setup parameters and Table screens Graph formats such as Coordinates Axes etc Graph screens Y Editors However both graphs share common function and stat plot definitions Note The Y Editor is completely independent only when the two sides use different graphing modes as described below Independent graph related applications Y Editor Graph screen etc can be displayed on both sides of the sc...

Страница 485: ... are set for function graphing Although both sides show the same function list you can select Ÿ different functions for graphing Note If you make a change on the active Y Editor redefine a function change a style etc that change is not reflected on the inactive side until you switch to it When both sides use different graphing modes each side shows a different function list When both sides use the...

Страница 486: ...plit 1 App and or Split 2 App To exit two graph mode Use 3 to set Number of Graphs 1 or exit the split screen by setting Split Screen FULL or Press 2 K twice This always exits a split screen and returns to a full sized Home screen Note You can display non graph related applications such as the Home screen on only one side at a time Remember that the Two Sides Are Independent Remember that the Two ...

Страница 487: ...rawing a Function or Inverse on a Graph Drawing a Function or Inverse on a Graph Drawing a Function or Inverse on a Graph Drawing a Function or Inverse on a Graph For comparison purposes you may want to draw a function over your current graph Typically the drawn function is some variation of the graph You can also draw the inverse of a function These operations are not available for 3D graphs For ...

Страница 488: ... Home screen or a program You cannot draw a function or equation interactively from the Graph screen DrawFunc expression DrawParm expression1 expression2 tmin tmax tstep DrawPol expression qmin qmax qstep For example 1 Define y1 x 1x3 2x 6 on the Y Editor and graph the function 2 On the Graph screen press ˆ and select 2 DrawFunc To display the Home screen and put DrawFunc in the entry line press ˆ...

Страница 489: ...nteractively from the Graph screen DrawInv expression For example use the graph of y1 x 1x3 2x 6 as shown above 1 On the Graph screen press and select 3 DrawInv To display the Home screen and put DrawInv in the entry line press ˆ 3 4 Press to draw the function on the Graph screen You cannot trace zoom or perform a math operation on a drawn function Note To clear the drawn function press or 2 On th...

Страница 490: ...e objects are not available for 3D graphs Clearing All Drawings Clearing All Drawings Clearing All Drawings Clearing All Drawings A drawn object is not part of the graph itself It is drawn on top of the graph and remains on the screen until you clear it From the Graph screen Note You can also enter ClrDraw on the Home screen s entry line You can also do anything that causes the Smart Graph feature...

Страница 491: ...a white pixel the pencil draws a black point or line If you start on a black pixel the pencil draws a white point or line which can act as an eraser 1 and select 1 Pencil 2 Move the cursor to the applicable location To draw a Do this Point pixel sized Press Freehand line Press and hold 1 and move the cursor to draw the line To quit drawing the line release or 1 After drawing the point or line you ...

Страница 492: ...applicable location Note These techniques also erase parts of graphed functions Drawing a Line Between Two Points Drawing a Line Between Two Points Drawing a Line Between Two Points Drawing a Line Between Two Points From the Graph screen 1 and select 3 Line To erase Do this Area under the box Press Along a freehand line Press and hold 1 and move the cursor to erase the line To quit release or 1 Af...

Страница 493: ...nts 2 B etc Drawing a Circle Drawing a Circle Drawing a Circle Drawing a Circle From the Graph screen 1 and select 4 Circle Note Use 2 to move the cursor in larger increments 2 B etc After drawing the line you are still in Line mode To continue drawing another line move the cursor to a new 1st point To quit press N 2 Move the cursor to the center of the circle and press 3 Move the cursor to set th...

Страница 494: ...itially displayed on an axis it may be difficult to see However you can easily see the flashing cursor 2 Use the cursor pad to move the line to the appropriate position Then press Note Use 2 to move the cursor in larger increments 2 B etc Drawing a Tangent Line Drawing a Tangent Line Drawing a Tangent Line Drawing a Tangent Line To draw a tangent line use the Math toolbar menu From the Graph scree...

Страница 495: ...pe To draw a line through a specified point with a specified slope execute the DrawSlp command from the Home screen or a program Use the syntax DrawSlp x y slope You can also access DrawSlp from the Graph screen 1 ˆ and select 6 DrawSlp This switches to the Home screen and puts DrawSlp in the entry line 3 Move the cursor to the tangent point and press The tangent line is drawn and its equation is ...

Страница 496: ...om the Home Screen or a Program From the Home Screen or a Program From the Home Screen or a Program Commands are available for drawing any of the objects described in this section There are also commands such as PxlOn PxlLine etc that let you draw objects by specifying exact pixel locations on the screen For a list of the available drawing commands refer to Drawing on the Graph Screen in Programmi...

Страница 497: ... of the Whole Graph Screen Saving a Picture of the Whole Graph Screen Saving a Picture of the Whole Graph Screen Saving a Picture of the Whole Graph Screen A picture includes any plotted functions axes tick marks and drawn objects The picture does not include lower and upper bound indicators prompts or cursor coordinates Display the Graph screen as you want to save it and then 1 Press ƒ and select...

Страница 498: ...A box is shown around the outer edge of the screen Note You cannot save a portion of a 3D graph 2 Set the 1st corner of the box by moving its top and left sides Then press Note Use D and C to move the top or bottom and use B and A to move the sides 3 Set the 2nd corner by moving the bottom and right sides Then press 4 Specify the folder and a unique variable name 5 Press After typing in an input b...

Страница 499: ...ed from a Portion of the Graph Screen For Pictures Saved from a Portion of the Graph Screen For Pictures Saved from a Portion of the Graph Screen When you press ƒ and select 1 Open the picture is superimposed starting at the upper left corner of the Graph screen If the picture was saved from a portion of the Graph screen it may appear shifted from the underlying graph You can specify which screen ...

Страница 500: ...the Technical Reference module To display a series of graph pictures as an animation use the CyclePic command For an example refer to CyclePic Command Animating a Series of Graph Pictures Animating a Series of Graph Pictures Animating a Series of Graph Pictures Animating a Series of Graph Pictures As described earlier in this module you can save a picture of a graph By using the CyclePic command y...

Страница 501: ...rates 10 views of a 3D graph with each view rotated 10 further around the Z axis For information about each command refer to the CyclePic picNameString n wait cycles direction Ê base name of pictures in quotes such as pic Ë of pictures to cycle Ì seconds between Í of times to repeat cycle Ê Ë Ì Í Î ...

Страница 502: ...y Other Graph from Program cyc Prgm local I Set mode and Window variables setMode graph 3d 70 eyef M10 xmin 10 xmax 14 xgrid M10 ymin 10 ymax 14 ygrid M10 zmin 10 zmax 1 zscl Define the function x 3ùy y 3ùx 390 z1 x y Generate pics and rotate For i 1 10 1 iù10 eyeq DispG StoPic pic string i EndFor Display animation CyclePic pic 10 5 5 M1 EndPrgm ...

Страница 503: ... a particular graph By saving a graph database as a GDB variable you can recreate that graph at a later time by opening its stored database variable Elements in a Graph Database Elements in a Graph Database Elements in a Graph Database Elements in a Graph Database A graph database consists of Mode settings 3 for Graph Angle Complex Format and Split Screen only if you are using the two graph mode A...

Страница 504: ...you open a graph database all information in the current database is replaced You may want to store the current graph database before opening a stored database From the Y Editor Window Editor Table screen or Graph screen 1 Press ƒ and select 2 Save Copy As 2 Specify the folder and a unique variable name 3 Press After typing in an input box such as Variable you must press twice 1 Press ƒ and select...

Страница 505: ...ator memory To delete them use the VAR LINK screen 2 described in Memory and Variable Management From a Program or the Home Screen From a Program or the Home Screen From a Program or the Home Screen From a Program or the Home Screen You can save store and open recall a graph database by using the StoGDB and RclGDB commands as described in the Technical Reference module ...

Страница 506: ...lit screen it remains in effect until you change it Setting the Split Screen Mode Setting the Split Screen Mode Setting the Split Screen Mode Setting the Split Screen Mode 1 Press 3 to display the MODE dialog box 2 Because the modes related to split screens are listed on the second page of the MODE dialog box either Use D to scroll down or Press to display Page 2 3 Set the Split Screen mode to eit...

Страница 507: ... the split screen is displayed Note In two graph mode described in Additional Graphing Topics the same application can be in both parts of a split screen Before pressing to close the MODE dialog box you can use the Split 1 App and Split 2 App modes to select the applications you want to use Mode Specifies the application in the Split 1 App Top or left part of the split screen Split 2 App Bottom or...

Страница 508: ...creen Ratio mode settings affect the number of pixels available on the Graph screen Note For a list of drawing commands refer to Drawing on the Graph Screen in Programming Due to the border that indicates the active application split screens have a smaller displayable area than a full screen TI 89 Titanium Mode Description Number of Graphs Note Leave this set to 1 unless you have read the applicab...

Страница 509: ...lit Ratio x y x y FULL N A 0 238 0 102 N A N A TOP BOTTOM 1 1 1 2 2 1 0 234 0 234 0 234 0 46 0 26 0 68 0 234 0 234 0 234 0 46 0 68 0 26 LEFT RIGHT 1 1 1 2 2 1 0 116 0 76 0 156 0 98 0 98 0 98 0 116 0 156 0 76 0 98 0 98 0 98 Method 1 Press 3 to display the MODE dialog box Then set Split Screen FULL When you press to close the dialog box the full sized screen shows the application specified in Split ...

Страница 510: ... the Apps desktop press O The split screen status appears at the top of the Apps desktop with the names of the open Apps and the portions of the screen in which each App is displayed Note The Apps desktop always appears in the full screen view Method 2 Press 2 K twice to display a full sized Home screen If the calculator is turned off When you turn the calculator on again When you press 2 The spli...

Страница 511: ...plication that will appear in the top portion of the screen 2 indicates the application that will appear in the bottom portion of the screen The highlighted numeral indicates the active portion of the split screen Names of open Apps Split screen indicator Names of open Apps Split screen indicator ...

Страница 512: ...and status line which are always the full width of the display are associated with the active application For applications that have an entry line such as the Home screen and Y Editor the entry line is the full width of the display only when that application is active Left right split screen 1 indicates the application that will appear in the left portion of the screen 2 indicates the application ...

Страница 513: ...ator switches to that application Note In two graph mode described in Additional Graphing Topics the same application can be in both parts of a split screen Method 1 1 Use 2 a to switch to the application you want to replace 2 Use O or 8 such as 8 to select the new application Method 2 3 Press 3 and then 4 Change Split 1 App and or Split 2 App If you set Split 1 App and Split 2 App to the same app...

Страница 514: ...n you select a TOP BOTTOM split remember that the entry line and the toolbar are always associated with the active application For example If the Home screen Pressing 2 K Is not already displayed Opens the Home screen in place of the active application Is displayed but is not the active application Switches to the Home screen and makes it the active application Is the active application Exits the ...

Страница 515: ...Split Screens 515 Note Both Top Bottom and Left Right splits use the same methods to select an application ...

Страница 516: ...Variable List Variable List Variable List Variable A list is a series of items numbers expressions or character strings that may or may not be related Each item is called an element In the Data Matrix Editor a list variable If you enter more than one column of elements in a list variable it is converted automatically into a data variable Is shown as a single column of elements each in a separate c...

Страница 517: ...ection of lists that may or may not be related In the Data Matrix Editor a data variable Although you must use commas to separate elements on the entry line spaces separate the elements in the history area To refer to a specified element in a list use the format shown to the right Ê Name of list variable Ë Element number or index number Can have up to 99 columns Can have up to 999 elements in each...

Страница 518: ...ata variable to create Ë Names of existing list Although you cannot directly display a data variable on the Home screen you can display a specified column or element Ê Name of data variable Ë Column number Ì Column number Í Element number in the column For example Ê Displays column 1 of the variable data1 Ë Displays element 1 in column 1 of the variable data1 NewData data1 list1 list2 Ê Ë data1 1 ...

Страница 519: ...een Note Use brackets to refer to a specific element in a matrix For example enter mat1 2 1 to access the 1st element in the 2nd row Looks similar to a data variable but all columns must have the same length Is initially created with 0 in each cell You can then enter the applicable value in place of 0 From the Home screen or a program you can use 9 to store a matrix with either of the equivalent m...

Страница 520: ... Creating a New Data Matrix or List Variable Creating a New Data Matrix or List Variable Creating a New Data Matrix or List Variable Creating a New Data Matrix or List Variable 1 Press O and then select the Data Matrix icon Press 2 Select 3 New 3 Specify the applicable information for the new variable Item Lets you Type Select the type of variable to create Press B to display a menu of available t...

Страница 521: ...iable You can leave the Data Matrix Editor and go to another application at any time To return to the variable that was displayed when you left the Data Matrix Editor launch Data Matrix Editor again and select 1 Current Variable Type a new variable name If you specify a variable that already exists an error message will be displayed when you press When you press N or to acknowledge the error the N...

Страница 522: ...Another Variable Opening Another Variable You can open another variable at any time 1 From the Data Matrix Editor press ƒ and select 1 Open or From any application launch Data Matrix Editor again and select 2 Open Note Variable shows the first existing variable in alphabetic order If there are no existing variables nothing is displayed 1 Press ƒ and select 3 New 2 Specify the type folder and varia...

Страница 523: ... you create a new variable the Data Matrix Editor is initially blank for a list or data variable or filled with zeros for a matrix If you open an existing variable the values in that variable are displayed You can then enter additional values or edit the existing ones The Data Matrix Editor Screen The Data Matrix Editor Screen The Data Matrix Editor Screen The Data Matrix Editor Screen A blank Dat...

Страница 524: ...move the cursor to the entry line 3 Type a new value or edit the existing one 4 Press to enter the value into the highlighted cell When you press the cursor automatically moves to highlight the next cell so that you can continue entering or editing values However the variable type affects the direction that the cursor moves Note To enter a new value you can start typing without pressing or first H...

Страница 525: ...y How Rows and Columns Are Filled Automatically How Rows and Columns Are Filled Automatically When you enter a value in a cell the cursor moves to the next cell However you can move the cursor to any cell and enter a value If you leave gaps between cells your device handles the gaps automatically To move the cursor Press One cell at a time D C B or A One page at a time 2 and then D C B or A Go to ...

Страница 526: ... column are handled the same as a list However if you leave a gap between columns that column is blank In a matrix variable when you enter a value in a cell outside the current boundaries additional rows and or columns are added automatically to the matrix to include the new cell Other cells in the new rows and or columns are filled with zeros Note Although you specify the size of a matrix when yo...

Страница 527: ...s ƒ 9 or 8 F Note Remember to see a number in full precision you can always highlight the cell and look at the entry line 2 With the current Cell Width setting highlighted press B or A to display a menu of digits 3 through 12 3 Move the cursor to highlight a number and press For single digit numbers you can type the number and press 4 Press to close the dialog box Cell width is the maximum number ...

Страница 528: ...Expression Defining a Column Header with an Expression For a list variable or a column in a data variable you can enter a function in the column header that automatically generates a list of elements In a data variable you can also define one column in terms of another Entering a Header Definition Entering a Header Definition Entering a Header Definition Entering a Header Definition In the Data Ma...

Страница 529: ...ever if you want to edit the existing definition you must press To view an existing definition press or move the cursor to the header cell and look at the entry line 2 Type the new expression which replaces any existing definition If you used or in Step 1 the cursor moved to the entry line and highlighted the existing definition if any You can also Press M to clear the highlighted expression Then ...

Страница 530: ...te For a data variable header definitions are saved when you leave the Data Matrix Editor For a list variable the definitions are not saved only their resulting cell values You can use an expression that For example Generates a series of numbers c1 seq x 2 x 1 5 c1 1 2 3 4 5 Refers to another column c2 2ùc1 c4 c1ùc2 sin c3 3 Press D or C to save the definition and update the columns Ê c1 seq x x 1...

Страница 531: ...n Using an Existing List as a Column Suppose you have one or more existing lists and you want to use those existing lists as columns in a data variable From the Do this Data Matrix Editor In the applicable column use to define the column header Refer to the existing list variable For example c1 list1 Home screen or a program Use the NewData command as described in the Technical Reference module Fo...

Страница 532: ...o the Technical Reference module The Auto calculate Feature The Auto calculate Feature The Auto calculate Feature The Auto calculate Feature For list and data variables the Data Matrix Editor has an Auto calculate feature By default Auto calculate ON Therefore if you make a change that affects a header definition or any column referenced in a header definition all header definitions are recalculat...

Страница 533: ...ug the error Using Shift and CumSum Functions in a Column Using Shift and CumSum Functions in a Column Using Shift and CumSum Functions in a Column Using Shift and CumSum Functions in a Column Header Header Header Header When defining a column header you can use the shift and cumSum functions as described below These descriptions differ slightly from the Technical Reference module This section des...

Страница 534: ... down Note To enter shift type it from the keyboard or select it from the CATALOG shift column integer Ê Ë Ê Column used as the base for the shift Ë Number of elements to shift positive shifts up negative shifts down Default is M1 Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ê c2 shift c1 2 Ë c3 shift c1 M2 Ì Shifted columns have the same length as the base Í Last two elements of c1 shift down and out the bottom undefined elements ...

Страница 535: ...xample Note To enter cumSum type it select it from the CATALOG or press 2 I and select it from the List submenu Sorting Columns Sorting Columns Sorting Columns Sorting Columns After entering information in a data list or matrix variable you can easily sort a specified column in numeric or alphabetical order You can also sort all columns as a whole based on a key column cumSum column Column used as...

Страница 536: ...atabase structure in which each column along the same row contains related information such as a student s first name last name and test scores In such a case sorting only a single column would destroy the relationship between the columns In the Data Matrix Editor 1 Move the cursor to any cell in the column 2 Press ˆ and select 3 Sort Column Numbers are sorted in ascending order Character strings ...

Страница 537: ... Variable Saving a Copy of a List Data or Matrix Variable Saving a Copy of a List Data or Matrix Variable You can save a copy of a list data or matrix variable You can also copy a list to a data variable or you can select a column from a data variable and copy that column to a list 1 Move the cursor to any cell in the key column 2 In this example move the cursor to the second column c2 to sort by ...

Страница 538: ...dure Procedure From the Data Matrix Editor 1 Display the variable that you want to copy 2 Press ƒ and select 2 Save Copy As You can copy a To a List List or data Data Data Data column List Matrix Matrix 3 In the dialog box Select the Type and Folder for the copy Type a variable name for the copy When available select the column to copy from Note If you type the name of an existing variable its con...

Страница 539: ...ariable can have multiple columns but a list variable can have only one column Therefore when copying from a data variable to a list you must select the column that you want to copy Ê Column is dimmed unless you copy a data column to a list The column information is not used for other types of copies Ê List variable to copy to Ë Data column that will be copied to the list By default this shows the...

Страница 540: ...the steps used to perform a statistical calculation or graph a statistical plot For detailed descriptions refer to the following pages 1 Set Graph mode 3 to FUNCTION 2 Enter stat data in the Data Matrix Editor Note Refer to the Data Matrix Editor module for details on entering data in the Data Matrix Editor 3 Perform stat calculations to find stat variables or fit data to a model 4 Define and sele...

Страница 541: ...statistical calculations You can analyze one variable or two variable statistics or perform several types of regression analyses The Calculate Dialog Box The Calculate Dialog Box The Calculate Dialog Box The Calculate Dialog Box You must have a data variable opened The Data Matrix Editor will not perform statistical calculations with a list or matrix variable 6 Change the graph format if necessary...

Страница 542: ...xample shows all items as active On your calculator items are active only if they are valid for the current settings of Calculation Type and Freq and Categories Note If an item is not valid for the current settings it will appear dimmed You cannot move the cursor to a dimmed item Pathname of the data variable ...

Страница 543: ...u store the regression equation so that it will be displayed in the Y Editor Use Freq and Categories Select NO or YES Note that Freq Category and Include Categories are active only when Use Freq and Categories YES Freq Type the column number that contains a weight value for each data point If you do not enter a column number all data points are assumed to have the same weight 1 Category Type the c...

Страница 544: ...e For example Note Any undefined data points shown as undef are ignored in a stat calculation 4 To close the STAT VARS screen press Redisplaying the STAT VARS Screen Redisplaying the STAT VARS Screen Redisplaying the STAT VARS Screen Redisplaying the STAT VARS Screen The Data Matrix Editor s Stat toolbar menu redisplays the previous calculation results until they are cleared from memory H Previous...

Страница 545: ...s Statistical Calculation Types Statistical Calculation Types Statistical Calculation Types As described in the previous section the Calculate dialog box lets you specify the statistical calculation you want to perform This section gives more information about the calculation types Selecting the Calculation Type Selecting the Calculation Type Selecting the Calculation Type Selecting the Calculatio...

Страница 546: ...ransformed values x and ln y LinReg Linear regression Fits the data to the model y ax b where a is the slope and b is the y intercept using a least squares fit and x and y LnReg Logarithmic regression Fits the data to the model equation y a b ln x using a least squares fit and transformed values ln x and y Logistic Logistic regression Fits the data to the model y a 1 bùe cùx d and updates all the ...

Страница 547: ... data to the model equation y axb using a least squares fit and transformed values ln x and ln y QuadReg Quadratic regression Fits the data to the second order polynomial y ax2 bx c You must have at least three data points For three points the equation is a polynomial fit For four or more points it is a polynomial regression QuartReg Quartic regression Fits the data to the fourth order polynomial ...

Страница 548: ...mory and Variable Management All statistical variables are cleared when you edit the data or change the calculation type Other conditions that clear the variables are listed Calculated Variables Calculated Variables Calculated Variables Calculated Variables Statistical variables are stored as system variables However regCoef and regeq are treated as a list and a function variable respectively One ...

Страница 549: ... y sy sum of x y values Gxy minimum of x values minX minX maximum of x values maxX maxX minimum of y values minY maximum of y values maxY 1st quartile q1 median medStat 3rd quartile q3 regression equation regeq regression coefficients a b c d e regCoef correlation coefficient corr coefficient of determination R2 summary points MedMed only medx1 medy1 medx2 medy2 medx3 medy3 One Var Two Var Regress...

Страница 550: ...d maxX Defining a Statistical Plot Defining a Statistical Plot Defining a Statistical Plot Defining a Statistical Plot From the Data Matrix Editor you can use the entered data to define several types of statistical plots You can define up to nine plots at a time Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure From the Data Matrix Editor 1 Press to display the Plot Setup screen Initially none of the plots ...

Страница 551: ...Type Select the type of plot Mark Select the symbol used to plot the data points Box Cross x Plus Square 0 or Dot x Type the column number in the Data Matrix Editor C1 C2 etc used for x values the independent variable y Type the column number used for y values the dependent variable This is active only for Plot Type Scatter or xyline Hist Bucket Width Specifies the width of each bar in a histogram...

Страница 552: ...ategory and Include Categories is available Freq Type the column number that contains a weight value for each data point If you do not enter a column number all data points are assumed to have the same weight 1 Category Type the column number that contains a category value for each data point Include Categories If you specify a Category you can use this to limit the calculation to specified catego...

Страница 553: ...Deselecting a Plot From Plot Setup highlight the plot and press to toggle it on or off If a stat plot is selected it remains selected when you Change the graph mode Stat plots are not graphed in 3D mode Execute a Graph command Open a different variable in the Data Matrix Editor The Plot Setup screen is redisplayed The plot you just defined is automatically selected for graphing Notice the shorthan...

Страница 554: ...ot and press To redefine an existing plot you do not necessarily need to clear it first you can make changes to the existing definition To prevent a plot from graphing you can deselect it Statistical Plot Types Statistical Plot Types Statistical Plot Types Statistical Plot Types When you define a plot as described in the previous section the Plot Setup screen lets you select the plot type This sec...

Страница 555: ...the same length Xyline Xyline Xyline Xyline Plotted points are shown with the symbol that you select as the Mark If necessary you can specify the same column or list for both x and y This is a scatter plot in which data points are plotted and connected in the order in which they appear in x and y You may want to sort all the columns in the Data Matrix Editor before plotting H ˆ 3 or ˆ 4 ...

Страница 556: ... to show statistical data as a modified box plot Select Mod Box Plot as the Plot Type when you define a plot in the Data Matrix Editor A modified box plot excludes points outside the interval Q1NX Q3 X where X is defined as 1 5 Q3NQ1 These points called outliers are plotted individually beyond the box plot s whiskers using the mark that you select A box is defined by its first quartile Q1 median M...

Страница 557: ...ge ZoomData 9 from the Graph screen Y Editor or Window Editor adjusts xmin and xmax to include all data points but it does not adjust the y axis Use 8 to set ymin 0 and ymax the number of data points expected in the tallest bar When defining the plot you can specify the Hist Bucket Width default is 1 to set the width of each bar A data point at the edge of a bar is counted in the bar to the right ...

Страница 558: ...Using the Y Editor with Stat Plots The previous sections described how to define and select stat plots from the Data Matrix Editor You can also define and select stat plots from the Y Editor When you trace a histogram the screen shows information about the traced bar Trace cursor Range of the traced bar of data points in the traced bar ...

Страница 559: ...unctions However the PLOTS indicator provides some information To see the list of stat plots use C to scroll above the y x functions From the Y Editor you can perform most of the same operations on a stat plot as you can on any other y x function For example PLOTS 23 means that Plots 2 3 are selected If a Plot is highlighted this shows the data variable that will be used for the plots If a Plot is...

Страница 560: ... the same time Graphing and Tracing a Defined Stat Plot Graphing and Tracing a Defined Stat Plot Graphing and Tracing a Defined Stat Plot Graphing and Tracing a Defined Stat Plot After entering the data points and defining the stat plots you can graph the selected plots by using the same methods you used to graph a function from the Y Editor as described in Basic Function Graphing To Do this Edit ...

Страница 561: ...o display the Window Editor You can either Enter appropriate values or Select 9 ZoomData from the Zoom toolbar menu Although you can use any zoom ZoomData is optimized for st plots Note Zoom is available on the Y Editor Window Editor and Graph screen ZoomData sets the viewing window to display all statistical data points For histograms and box plots only xmin and xmax are adjusted If the top of a ...

Страница 562: ...layed the Graph screen does not automatically pan if you trace off the left or right side of the screen However you can still press to center the screen on the trace cursor Press 9 or H 8 F from the Y Editor Window Editor or Graph screen Then change the settings as necessary Plot Type Description Scatter or xyline Tracing begins at the first data point Box plot Tracing begins at the median Press A...

Страница 563: ... Category values let you analyze a subset of the data points Example of a Frequency Column Example of a Frequency Column Example of a Frequency Column Example of a Frequency Column In a data variable you can use any column in the Data Matrix Editor to specify a frequency value or weight for the data points on each row A frequency value must be an integer 0 if Calculation Type OneVar or MedMed or i...

Страница 564: ...e of 0 effectively removes the data point from analysis To use frequency values specify the frequency column when you perform a statistical calculation or define a stat plot For example Test scores Frequency values c1 c2 These weighted scores are equivalent to the single column of scores listed to the right c1 85 1 85 97 1 97 92 2 92 Ê 89 1 92 Ê 91 1 89 95 3 91 95 Ë 95 Ë 95 Ë ...

Страница 565: ...hat has 10th and 11th grade students You want to analyze the scores for the whole class but you also want to analyze categories such as 10th grade girls 10th grade boys 10th grade girls and boys etc First determine the category values you want to use Note You do not need a category value for the whole class Also you do not need category values for all 10th graders or all 11th graders since they ar...

Страница 566: ...e category values in two columns To use category values specify the category column and the category values to include in the analysis when you perform a statistical calculation or define a stat plot Test scores Category values c1 c2 85 1 97 3 92 2 88 3 90 2 95 1 79 4 68 2 92 4 84 3 82 1 ...

Страница 567: ...o analyze Include Categories 10th grade girls 1 10th grade boys 2 10th grade girls and boys 1 2 11th grade girls 3 11th grade boys 4 11th grade girls and boys 3 4 all girls 10th and 11th 1 3 all boys 10th and 11th 2 4 Type the column number or list name that contains the category values Set this to YES Within braces type the category values to use separated by commas Do not type a column number or...

Страница 568: ...ored in the CBL 2 unit itself You must then retrieve the data transfer it to the Voyage 200 by using the Get command which is described in the Technical Reference module Although each set of retrieved data can be stored in several variable types list real matrix pic using list variables makes it easier to perform statistical calculations When you transfer the collected information to the Voyage 20...

Страница 569: ...CBL 2 Lists When you perform a statistical calculation or define a plot you can refer explicitly to the CBL 2 list variables For example Creating a Data Variable with the CBL 2 Lists Creating a Data Variable with the CBL 2 Lists Creating a Data Variable with the CBL 2 Lists Creating a Data Variable with the CBL 2 Lists You can create a new data variable that consists of the necessary CBL 2 list va...

Страница 570: ...refer to the Data Matrix Editor module At this point the columns are linked to the CBL 2 lists If the lists are changed the columns will be updated automatically However if the lists are deleted the data will be lost To make the data variable independent of the CBL 2 lists clear the column header for each column The information remains in the column but the column is no longer linked to the CBL 2 ...

Страница 571: ...ts 571 CBR CBR CBR CBR You can also use the Calculator Based Ranger CBR to explore the mathematical and scientific relationships between distance velocity acceleration and time using data collected from activities you perform ...

Страница 572: ...if any is displayed on the Program I O screen in a dialog box or on the Graph screen Running a Program Running a Program Running a Program Running a Program On the Home screen 1 Type the name of the program 3 Press 2 You must always type a set of parentheses after the name Some programs require you to pass an argument to the program Note Use 2 to list existing PRGM variables Highlight a variable a...

Страница 573: ...f an error occurs press N You can then correct any problems and run the program again Note The Voyage 200 also checks for run time errors that are found within the program itself Breaking a Program Breaking a Program Breaking a Program Breaking a Program When a program is running the BUSY indicator is displayed in the status line Do not enter after the program name This error message appears if yo...

Страница 574: ...mation Graph related commands typically use the Graph screen After the program stops the Voyage 200 shows the last screen that was displayed The Program I O Screen The Program I O Screen The Program I O Screen The Program I O Screen On the Program I O screen new output is displayed below any previous output which may have been displayed earlier in the same program or a different program After a fu...

Страница 575: ...not perform calculations on this screen Note If Home screen calculations don t work after you run a program you may be on the Program I O screen Leaving the Program I O Screen Leaving the Program I O Screen Leaving the Program I O Screen Leaving the Program I O Screen From the Program I O screen Press to toggle between the Home screen and the Program I O screen or Press N 2 K or H 8 to display the...

Страница 576: ...function or start a new program or function Starting a New Program or Function Starting a New Program or Function Starting a New Program or Function Starting a New Program or Function 1 Press O and then select Program Editor 2 Select 3 New 3 Specify the applicable information for the new program or function Item Lets you Type Select whether to create a new program or function Folder Select the fol...

Страница 577: ...am Resuming the Current Program Resuming the Current Program Resuming the Current Program You can leave the Program Editor and go to another application at any time To return to the program or function that was displayed when you left the Program Editor launch Program Editor again and select 1 Current Variable Type a variable name for the program or function If you specify a variable that already ...

Страница 578: ...ram Opening a Previous Program Opening a Previous Program You can open a previously created program or function at any time 1 From within the Program Editor press ƒ and select 1 Open or From another application launch Program Editor again and select 2 Open Note By default Variable shows the first existing program or function in alphabetical order 1 Press ƒ and select 3 New 2 Specify the type folde...

Страница 579: ...am Editor sessions are saved automatically you can accumulate quite a few previous programs and functions which take up memory storage space To delete programs and functions use the VAR LINK screen 2 For information about VAR LINK refer to the Memory and Variable Management module Overview of Entering a Program Overview of Entering a Program Overview of Entering a Program Overview of Entering a Pr...

Страница 580: ...tering and Editing Text in the Text Editor module After typing each program line press This inserts a new blank line and lets you continue entering another line A program line can be longer than one line on the screen if so it will wrap to the next screen line automatically Note Entering a command does not execute that command It is not executed until you run the program Entering Multi Command Lin...

Страница 581: ...ormation that is useful to someone reading the program code To enter the comment symbol press 2 X or Press and select 9 Controlling the Flow of a Program Controlling the Flow of a Program Controlling the Flow of a Program Controlling the Flow of a Program When you run a program the program lines are executed in sequential order However some commands alter the program flow For example Ê Ë prog1 Prg...

Страница 582: ... results are not displayed unless you use an output command This is an important difference between performing a calculation on the Home screen and in a program For more complex programs that use If EndIf and loop structures such as For EndFor you can make the programs easier to read and understand by using indentation If x 5 Then Disp x is 5 Else Disp x is or 5 EndIf These calculations will not d...

Страница 583: ...en refer to these variables Note A list of input commands is available Displaying a calculation result does not store that result If you need to refer to a result later store it to a variable cos p 4 maximum Disp maximum Enter the values directly into the program itself Disp 12ù6 cos p 4 maximum Include input commands that prompt the users to enter the necessary values when they run the program In...

Страница 584: ...te the program in the Program Editor Note In this example you cannot use circle as the program name because it conflicts with a command name Before drawing the circle the program turns off any selected Y Editor functions displays a standard viewing window and squares the window In the beside the program name specify the variables that will be used to store the passed values Notice that the program...

Страница 585: ...s and instructions that you typically use from the Home screen Why Create a User Defined Function Why Create a User Defined Function Why Create a User Defined Function Why Create a User Defined Function Functions as well as programs are ideal for repetitive calculations or tasks You only need to write the function once Then you can reuse it as many times as necessary Functions however have some ad...

Страница 586: ... names Note You can create a function from the Home screen but the Program Editor is more convenient for complex multi line functions Differences Between Functions and Programs Differences Between Functions and Programs Differences Between Functions and Programs Differences Between Functions and Programs This guidebook sometimes uses the word command as a generic reference to instructions and func...

Страница 587: ...function Cannot call a program as a subroutine but it can call another user defined function Cannot define a program Cannot define a global function but it can define a local function Note Information about local variables is available Entering a Function Entering a Function Entering a Function Entering a Function When you create a new function in the Program Editor the Voyage 200 displays a blank...

Страница 588: ...rom a Function How to Return a Value from a Function There are two ways to return a value from a function As the last line in the function before EndFunc calculate the value to be returned cube x Func x 3 EndFunc Function name which you specify when you create a new function Enter your commands between Func and EndFunc All function lines begin with a colon Be sure to edit this line to include any ...

Страница 589: ... There is an implied Return at the end of the function If the last line is not an expression an error occurs Example of a Function Example of a Function Example of a Function Example of a Function The following function returns the xth root of a value y Two values must be passed to the function x and y Use Return This is useful for exiting a function and returning a value at some point other than ...

Страница 590: ...ing One Program from Another One program can call another program as a subroutine The subroutine can be external a separate program or internal included in the main program Subroutines are useful when a program needs to repeat the same group of commands at several different places Function as called from the Home Screen Function as defined in the Program Editor 4ùxroot 3 125 20 xroot x y Func y 1 ...

Страница 591: ...an Internal Subroutine Calling an Internal Subroutine Calling an Internal Subroutine Calling an Internal Subroutine To define an internal subroutine use the Define command with Prgm EndPrgm Because a subroutine must be defined before it can be called it is a good practice to define subroutines at the beginning of the main program subtest1 Prgm For i 1 4 1 subtest2 i iù1000 EndFor EndPrgm subtest2 ...

Страница 592: ... about Using Subroutines Notes about Using Subroutines Notes about Using Subroutines At the end of a subroutine execution returns to the calling program To exit a subroutine at any other time use the Return command A subroutine cannot access local variables declared in the calling program Likewise the calling program cannot access local variables declared in a subroutine Ê Ë Ë Ì subtest1 Prgm loca...

Страница 593: ... the scope of the variables affects how they are stored and accessed Scope of Variables Scope of Variables Scope of Variables Scope of Variables Scope Description System Global Variables Variables with reserved names that are created automatically to store data about the state of the calculator For example Window variables xmin xmax ymin ymax etc are globally available from any folder You can alwa...

Страница 594: ...name For example 5 class start class Variable name start Folder Name After the program stops any folder variables created by the program still exist and still take up memory Local Variables Temporary variables that exist only while a program is running When the program stops local variables are deleted automatically To create a local variable in a program use the Local command to declare the varia...

Страница 595: ...defined function or running a program you can specify an argument that includes the same variable that was used to define the function or create the program However to avoid Circular definition errors you must assign a value for x or i variables that are used in evaluating the function or running the program For example Ê Causes a Circular definition error message if x or i does not have a value T...

Страница 596: ...itor etc CopyVar Copies the contents of a variable Define Defines a program subroutine or function variable within a program DelFold Deletes a folder All variables in that folder must be deleted first DelType Deletes unarchived variables of the specified type in all folders DelVar Deletes a variable getFold Returns the name of the current folder getType Returns a string that indicates the data typ...

Страница 597: ...y while a user defined function is being evaluated or a user defined program is running Lock Locks a variable so that it cannot be accidentally changed or deleted without first being unlocked MoveVar Moves a variable from one folder to another NewData Creates a data variable whose columns consist of a series of specified lists NewFold Creates a new folder NewPic Creates a picture variable based on...

Страница 598: ... automatically when the program stops so that it does not use up memory What Causes an Undefined Variable Error Message What Causes an Undefined Variable Error Message What Causes an Undefined Variable Error Message What Causes an Undefined Variable Error Message An Undefined variable error message displays when you evaluate a user defined function or run a user defined program that references a l...

Страница 599: ...alize Local Variables You Must Initialize Local Variables You Must Initialize Local Variables All local variables must be assigned an initial value before they are referenced Ê 1 is stored as the initial value for m The calculator cannot use a local variable to perform symbolic calculations Ê Define fact n Func Local m While n 1 n m m n 1 n EndWhile Return m EndFunc Ê Define fact n Func Local m 1 ...

Страница 600: ...tside of the program The following methods can help Refer to a global variable name typically with two or more characters that is not likely to exist outside of the function or program Include DelVar within the function or program to delete the global variable if it exists before referring to it DelVar does not delete locked or archived variables String Operations String Operations String Operatio...

Страница 601: ...ically store user input as a string and do not require the user to enter quotation marks A string cannot be evaluated mathematically even if it appears to be a numeric expression For example the string 61 represents the characters 6 and 1 not the number 61 Although you cannot use a string such as 61 or 2x 4 in a calculation you can convert a string into a numeric expression by using the expr comma...

Страница 602: ...f the string command Important Some user input commands store the entered value as a string Before you can perform a mathematical operation on that value you must convert it to a numeric expression format Returns an expression as a character string based on the format template fixed scientific engineering etc inString Searches a string to see if it contains a specified substring If so inString ret...

Страница 603: ...such as While EndWhile described later in this module right Returns a specified number of characters from the right side end of a string rotate Rotates the characters in a string The default is L1 rotate right one character shift Shifts the characters in a string and replaces them with spaces The default is L1 shift right one character and replace with one space Examples shift abcde 2 cde and shif...

Страница 604: ...ditional test that compares two values The values can be numbers expressions lists or matrices but they must match in type and dimension Press 2 I and select 8 Test Then select the operator from the menu or Display the built in functions Press 2 The test operators are listed near the bottom of the Built in menu Operator True if Example Greater than a 8 Less than a 0 Greater than or equal to a b 10...

Страница 605: ...nction The Not Function The Not Function The not function changes the result of a test from true to false and vice versa For example Note If you use not from the Home screen it is shown as in the history area For example not x 2 is shown as x 2 Operator True if Example and Both tests are true a 0 and a 10 or At least one test is true a 0 or b c 10 xor One test is true and the other is false a 6 b ...

Страница 606: ...also be used to branch or jump from one place to another in a program F2 Control Toolbar Menu F2 Control Toolbar Menu F2 Control Toolbar Menu F2 Control Toolbar Menu To enter If EndIf structures use the Program Editor s Control toolbar menu The If command is available directly from the menu To see a submenu that lists other If structures select 2 If Then When you select a structure such as If Then...

Страница 607: ... x before executing the If command Note Use indentation to make your programs easier to read and understand If Then EndIf Structures If Then EndIf Structures If Then EndIf Structures If Then EndIf Structures To execute one group of commands if a conditional test is true use the structure Ê Executed only if x 5 Ë Displays value of 2x if x 5 x if x 5 Ê Ë If x 5 Disp x is greater than 5 Disp x Ê Ê Ë ...

Страница 608: ...y if x 5 Ë Executed only if x 5 Ì Displays value of 2x if x 5 5x if x 5 If Then ElseIf EndIf Structures If Then ElseIf EndIf Structures If Then ElseIf EndIf Structures If Then ElseIf EndIf Structures A more complex form of the If command lets you test a series of conditions Suppose your program prompts the user for a number that corresponds to one of four options To test for each option If Choice ...

Страница 609: ... your program by using Lbl label and Goto commands Use the Lbl command to label assign a name to a particular location in the program You can then use the Goto command at any point in the program to branch to the location that corresponds to the specified label Lbl labelName name to assign to this location use the same naming convention as a variable name Goto labelName specifies which Lbl command...

Страница 610: ...a Group of Commands Using Loops to Repeat a Group of Commands Using Loops to Repeat a Group of Commands Using Loops to Repeat a Group of Commands To repeat the same group of commands successively use a loop Several types of loops are available Each type gives you a different way to exit the loop based on a conditional test F2 Control Toolbar Menu F2 Control Toolbar Menu F2 Control Toolbar Menu F2 ...

Страница 611: ...syntax of the For command is Note The ending value can be less than the beginning value but the increment must be negative When you select a loop the loop command and its corresponding End command are inserted at the cursor location For Ê EndFor Ê If the loop requires arguments the cursor is positioned after the command For variable begin end increment Ê variable used as a counter Ë counter value ...

Страница 612: ...hat the program can exit the loop after a certain number of repetitions At the end of the loop EndFor program control jumps back to the For command where variable is incremented and compared to end For example Ê Displays 0 1 2 3 4 and 5 Ë Displays 6 When variable increments to 6 the loop is not executed Note You can declare the counter variable as local if it does not need to be saved after the pr...

Страница 613: ...the condition You must include commands that allow the program to exit the loop At the end of the loop EndWhile program control jumps back to the While command where condition is re evaluated To execute the loop the first time the condition must initially be true Any variables referenced in the condition must be set before the While command You can build the values into the program or prompt the u...

Страница 614: ... When x increments to 5 the loop is not executed Loop EndLoop Loops Loop EndLoop Loops Loop EndLoop Loops Loop EndLoop Loops A Loop EndLoop creates an infinite loop which is repeated endlessly The Loop command does not have any arguments Ê Ë Ì Í 0 x While x 5 Disp x x 1 x EndWhile Disp x Loop EndLoop ...

Страница 615: ...te The Exit command exits from the current loop In this example the If command can be anywhere in the loop The If command could also use a Goto command to transfer program control to a specified Lbl label command Ê Ë 0 x Loop Disp x x 1 x If x 5 Exit EndLoop Disp x When the If command is The loop is At the beginning of the loop Executed only if the condition is true At the end of the loop Executed...

Страница 616: ...nd Goto Loops Although the Lbl label and Goto commands are not strictly loop commands they can be used to create an infinite loop For example As with Loop EndLoop the loop should contain commands that let the program exit from the loop Configuring the Configuring the Configuring the Configuring the Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Voyage 200 Programs can contain commands that change the configurat...

Страница 617: ...ode Command In the Program Editor Command Description getConfg Returns a list of calculator characteristics getFold Returns the name of the current folder getMode Returns the current setting for a specified mode getUnits Returns a list of default units setFold Sets the current folder setGraph Sets a specified graph format Coordinates Graph Order etc setMode Sets any mode except Current Folder setT...

Страница 618: ...tput Getting Input from the User and Displaying Output Although values can be built into a program or stored to variables in advance a program can prompt the user to enter information while the program is running Likewise a program can display information such as the result of a calculation 2 Press ˆ to display a list of modes Note The Mode menu does not let you set the Current Folder mode To set ...

Страница 619: ...ressed See the Technical Reference module for a listing of key codes Input Prompts the user to enter an expression The expression is treated according to how it is entered For example A numeric expression is treated as an expression An expression enclosed in quotes is treated as a string Input can also display the Graph screen and let the user update the variables xc and yc rc and qc in polar mode...

Страница 620: ...expression Request always treats the entered expression as a string Command Description Clr O Clears the Program I O screen Disp Displays an expression or string on the Program I O screen Disp can also display the current contents of the Program I O screen without displaying additional information DispG Displays the current contents of the Graph screen DispHome Displays the current contents of the...

Страница 621: ...n expression during the pause A pause lets users read your output and decide when they are ready to continue Text Displays a dialog box that contains a specified character string Command Description Dialog EndDlog Defines a program block consisting of Title Request etc commands that displays a dialog box Toolbar EndTbar Defines a program block consisting of Title Item etc commands that replaces th...

Страница 622: ... can contain any available function instruction or set of characters The calculator has a default custom menu that you can modify or redefine Custom EndCustm Defines a program block that displays a custom toolbar when the user presses 2 That toolbar remains in effect until the user presses 2 again or changes applications DropDown Displays a drop down menu within a dialog box Item Displays a menu i...

Страница 623: ...ces the normal toolbar menu Unless a different custom menu has been created the default custom menu is displayed To Do this Turn on the custom menu From the Home screen or any other application Press 2 From the Home screen or a program Execute the CustmOn command Turn off the custom menu From any application Press 2 again or Go to a different application Using the default custom menu on the Home s...

Страница 624: ... by that Item command is pasted to the current cursor location For example Custom Title Vars Item L1 Item M1 Item Prgm1 Item Func1 Item Data1 Item Text1 Item Pic1 Item GDB1 Item Str1 Ê Title f x Ê Item f x Item g x Item f x y Item g x y Ê Item f x h Item Define f x Title Solve Item Solve Item and Item x y Item Solve and x y Custom Title title of F1 menu Item item 1 Item item 2 Title title of F2 me...

Страница 625: ...Item c Item u Title Tools Item ClrHome Item NewProb Item CustmOff EndCustm CustmOn Note The following may be slightly different than the default custom menu on your calculator Note See how _ o C and _ o F display as C and F in the menu Similarly see the international accented characters To modify the default custom menu use 3 Restore custom default as described below to get the commands for the de...

Страница 626: ...eed Restoring the Default Custom Menu Restoring the Default Custom Menu Restoring the Default Custom Menu Restoring the Default Custom Menu To restore the default 1 From the Home screen s normal menu not the custom menu select Clean Up ˆ 3 Press to execute the commands and restore the default When you restore the default any previous custom menu is erased If the previous menu was created with a pr...

Страница 627: ...ays the current contents of the Table screen setTable Sets the Graph Table or Independent table parameters To set the other two table parameters you can store the applicable values to the tblStart and tbl system variables Table Builds and displays a table based on one or more expressions or functions Command Description ClrGraph Erases any functions or expressions that were graphed with the Graph ...

Страница 628: ...ot Creates a new stat plot definition PlotsOff Deselects all or only specified stat data plots PlotsOn Selects all or only specified stat data plots setGraph Changes settings for the various graph formats Coordinates Graph Order etc setMode Sets the Graph mode as well as other modes Style Sets the display style for a function Trace Lets a program trace a graph ZoomBox to ZoomTrig Perform all of th...

Страница 629: ... of two coordinate systems to specify a location on the screen CyclePic Animates a series of stored graph pictures NewPic Creates a graph picture variable based on a matrix RclGDB Restores all settings stored in a graph database RclPic Displays the Graph screen and superimposes a stored graph picture by using OR logic RplcPic Clears the Graph screen and displays a stored graph picture StoGDB Store...

Страница 630: ...nformation about pixel coordinates in split screens refer to the Data Matrix Editor module Many drawing commands have two forms one for pixel coordinates and one for point coordinates Note Pixel commands start with Pxl such as PxlChg Erasing Drawn Objects Erasing Drawn Objects Erasing Drawn Objects Erasing Drawn Objects Pixel coordinates independent of viewing window Point coordinates for standard...

Страница 631: ...xel at the specified coordinates PtOff which uses point coordinates affects the pixel closest to the specified point PtOn or PxlOn Turns on displays a pixel at the specified coordinates PtOn which uses point coordinates affects the pixel closest to the specified point PtTest or PxlTest Returns true or false to indicate if the specified coordinate is on or off respectively PtText or PxlText Display...

Страница 632: ...ases or inverts a horizontal line at a specified row coordinate LineTan Draws a tangent line for a specified expression at a specified point This draws the tangent line only not the expression LineVert or PxlVert Draws erases or inverts a vertical line at a specified column coordinate Command Description DrawFunc Draws a specified expression DrawInv Draws the inverse of a specified expression Draw...

Страница 633: ...Use the Program Editor s I O toolbar menu to enter the commands in this section 1 Press and select 8 Link 2 Select a command Command Description GetCalc Executed on the receiving unit Sets up the unit to receive a variable via the I O port After the receiving unit executes GetCalc the sending unit must execute SendCalc After the sending unit executes SendCalc the sent variable is stored on the rec...

Страница 634: ... refer to the manual that comes with the CBL 2 or CBR unit Debugging Programs and Handling Errors Debugging Programs and Handling Errors Debugging Programs and Handling Errors Debugging Programs and Handling Errors After you write a program you can use several techniques to find and correct errors You can also build an error handling command into the program itself Command Description Get Gets a v...

Страница 635: ...or messages can locate syntax errors but not errors in program logic The following techniques may be useful During testing do not use local variables so that you can check the variable values after the program stops When the program is debugged declare the applicable variables as local Within a program temporarily insert Disp and Pause commands to display the values of critical variables Disp and ...

Страница 636: ...tive Approaches Example Using Alternative Approaches Example Using Alternative Approaches The example in the Previews module shows a program that prompts the user to enter an integer sums all integers from 1 to the entered integer and displays the result This section gives several approaches that you can use to achieve the same goal Command Description Try EndTry Defines a program block that lets ...

Страница 637: ...splay the result Ê Prompts for input on Program I O screen Ë Converts string entered with InputStr to an expression Ì Loop calculation Í Displays output in a dialog box Note For type 8 µ zero For press 2 H Ê Ë Ì Ì Ì Ì Í prog1 Prgm InputStr Enter an integer n expr n n 0 temp 1 I While i n temp i temp i 1 I EndWhile Text The answer is string temp EndPrgm ...

Страница 638: ...loop and Disp to display the result Ê Prompts for input on Program I O screen Ë Loop calculation Ì Displays output on Program I O screen Note Because Prompt returns n as a number you do not need to use expr to convert n Ê Ë Ë Ì prog2 Prgm Prompt n 0 temp 1 I Lbl top temp i temp i 1 I If i n Goto top Disp temp EndPrgm ...

Страница 639: ...late the result Ê Defines a dialog box for input Ë Converts string entered with Request to an expression Ì Loop calculation Í Defines a dialog box for output Ê Ê Ë Ì Ì Í Í ê prog3 Prgm Dialog Title Enter an integer Request Integer n EndDlog expr n n 0 temp 0 I Loop temp i temp i 1 I If i n Exit EndLoop Dialog Title The answer is Text string temp EndDlog EndPrgm ...

Страница 640: ...as a number you do not need to use expr to convert n Ê Ë Ì prog4 Prgm Input Enter an integer n sum seq i i 1 n temp Disp temp EndPrgm Function Used in this example to seq Generate the sequence of integers from 1 to n sum Sum the integers in the list generated by seq seq expression var low high step Ê expression used to generate the sequence Ë variable that will be incremented Ì initial and final v...

Страница 641: ...ents web site at education ti com The programs available from this site provide additional functions or features that are not built into the Voyage 200 Check the Texas Instruments web site for up to date information After downloading a program from the web to your computer use a USB cable or TI GRAPH LINK computer to calculator cable and TI Connect software to send the program to your Voyage 200 F...

Страница 642: ...ore arguments type them within the Refer to the program s documentation to find out about required arguments If the program is not in the current folder be sure to specify the pathname You can call an assembly language program from another program as a subroutine delete it or use it the same as any other program Shortcuts to Run a Program Shortcuts to Run a Program Shortcuts to Run a Program Short...

Страница 643: ...n Assembly Language Program You cannot use your Voyage 200 to edit an assembly language program The built in Program Editor will not open assembly language programs Displaying a List of Assembly Language Programs Displaying a List of Assembly Language Programs Displaying a List of Assembly Language Programs Displaying a List of Assembly Language Programs To list the assembly language programs stor...

Страница 644: ...rmation about how to access Voyage 200 features The graphing calculator also includes an Exec command that executes a string consisting of a series of Motorola 68000 op codes These codes act as another form of an assembly language program Check the Texas Instruments web site for available information Note You must use a computer to write assembly language programs You cannot create assembly langua...

Страница 645: ...on Starting a New Session Starting a New Session Starting a New Session Starting a New Session 1 Press O and then select the Text Editor icon Press 2 Select 3 New The NEW dialog box is displayed 3 Specify a folder and text variable that you want to use to store the new session Item Description Type Automatically set as Text and cannot be changed Folder Shows the folder in which the text variable w...

Страница 646: ...ent Session Resuming the Current Session Resuming the Current Session Resuming the Current Session You can leave the Text Editor and go to another application at any time To return to the session that was displayed when you left the Text Editor launch Text Editor again and select 1 Current Variable Type a variable name If you specify a variable that already exists an error message will be displaye...

Страница 647: ...ous Session You can open a previous Text Editor session at any time 1 From within the Text Editor press ƒ and select 1 Open or From any application launch Text Editor again and select 2 Open Note By default Variable shows the first existing text variable in alphabetic order To leave the current Text Editor session and start a new one 1 Press ƒ and select 3 New 2 Specify a folder and text variable ...

Страница 648: ...ession Note about Deleting a Session Because all Text Editor sessions are saved automatically you can accumulate quite a few previous sessions which take up memory storage space To delete a session use the VAR LINK screen 2 to delete that session s text variable For information about VAR LINK refer to Memory and Variable Management Entering and Editing Text Entering and Editing Text Entering and E...

Страница 649: ...e bottom of the screen previous lines scroll off the top of the screen Using a TI GRAPH LINK unit to computer cable and TI Connect software with the Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator you can use the computer keyboard to type a text file and then send that file to the Voyage 200 This is useful if you need to create a lengthy text file For information about obtaining cables or updated TI Connect softwa...

Страница 650: ...g Alphabetic Characters Typing Alphabetic Characters Typing Alphabetic Characters Typing Alphabetic Characters To Press Type a single lowercase alpha character H the letter key Type a single uppercase alpha character H and then the letter key status line shows Type a space H spacebar Turn on lowercase alpha lock H no action needed Turn on uppercase ALPHA lock H 2 Turn off alpha lock H 2 turns off ...

Страница 651: ...cursor 0 or 7 The character to the right of the cursor 8 same as 0 All characters to the right of the cursor through the end of the paragraph M All characters in the paragraph regardless of the cursor s position in that paragraph M M To Do this Highlight text Move the cursor to the beginning or end of the text Hold and press A or B to highlight characters to the left or right of the cursor respect...

Страница 652: ... Cutting Copying and Pasting Text Cutting and copying both place highlighted text into the clipboard of the Voyage 200 Cutting deletes the text from its current location used to move text and copying leaves the text 1 Highlight the text you want to move or copy To Do this Replace highlighted text Type the new text Delete highlighted text Press 0 2 Press ƒ 3 Select the applicable menu item To move ...

Страница 653: ...xt From a text session to a different application For example you can paste the text into the Home screen s entry line Finding Text Finding Text Finding Text Finding Text From the Text Editor 1 Place the text cursor at any location preceding the text you want to search for All searches start at the current cursor location 2 Press 3 Type the search text The search is not case sensitive For example ...

Страница 654: ...tween insert and overtype mode press 2 Note Look at the shape of the cursor to see if you re in insert or overtype mode 4 Press twice If the search text is The cursor Found Moves to beginning of the search text Not found Does not move If the Voyage 200 is in The next character you type Will be inserted at the cursor Will replace the highlighted character Thin cursor between characters Cursor highl...

Страница 655: ...d characters from the keyboard To see which characters are available from the keyboard you can display a map that shows the characters and their corresponding keys Selecting Characters from the CHAR Menu Selecting Characters from the CHAR Menu Selecting Characters from the CHAR Menu Selecting Characters from the CHAR Menu 1 Press 2 G 2 Select the applicable category A menu lists the characters in ...

Страница 656: ...d map does not display all available shortcuts Refer to the inside front and the inside back covers of this guidebook for a complete list of shortcut keys To access the shortcuts first press the 2 key Some special characters are marked on the keyboard but most are not On the Voyage 200 Press to display the keyboard map Press N to exit the map Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator Keyboard map Voyage 200 ...

Страница 657: ... the Keyboard Typing Special Symbols from the Keyboard Typing Special Symbols from the Keyboard Typing Special Symbols from the Keyboard Note To help you find the applicable keys these maps show only the special symbols On the Voyage 200 f Press 2 and then the key for the symbol For example 2 H displays These special symbols are not affected by whether Caps Lock is on or off ...

Страница 658: ...percase letters An accent mark can be added to only those letters that are valid for that mark Pressing an accent mark key does not display an accented letter The accent mark will be added to the next letter you press 1 Press 2 and then the key for the accent mark Note To help you find the applicable keys this map shows only the accent mark keys Accent Mark Valid Letters lowercase or uppercase Exa...

Страница 659: ... If you press a key combination that does not access a Greek letter you get the normal letter for that key Your calculator does not display a map of Greek letters the map shown here is for reference only Several keys let you access lowercase and uppercase Greek letters For example On the Voyage 200 Press 2 G to access the Greek character set Press 2 G letter to access lowercase Greek letters Examp...

Страница 660: ...uting a Command Script Entering and Executing a Command Script Entering and Executing a Command Script By using a command script you can use the Text Editor to type a series of command lines that can be executed at any time on the Home screen This lets you create interactive example scripts in which you predefine a series of commands and then execute them individually Inserting a Command Mark Inse...

Страница 661: ...ace the cursor anywhere on the marked line 2 Press and select 4 Clear command 3 Select 1 Command C is displayed at the beginning of the text line to the left of the colon Note This does not insert a new line for the command it simply marks an existing line as a command line 4 Type a command just as you would on the Home screen The line can contain only the command with no additional text Note You ...

Страница 662: ...nd then the Text Editor is redisplayed After execution the cursor moves to the next line in the script so that you can continue to execute a series of commands Note To examine the result on the Home screen use a split screen or press H Splitting the Text Editor Home Screen Splitting the Text Editor Home Screen Splitting the Text Editor Home Screen Splitting the Text Editor Home Screen With a split...

Страница 663: ... a Script from Your Home Screen Entries Creating a Script from Your Home Screen Entries Creating a Script from Your Home Screen Entries Creating a Script from Your Home Screen Entries From the Home screen you can save all the entries in the history area to a text variable The entries are automatically saved in a script format so that you can open the text variable in the Text Editor and execute th...

Страница 664: ...to execute the command Note Some commands take longer to execute Wait until the Busy indicator disappears before pressing again 4 Continue using to execute each command but stop just before executing the Graph command 5 Execute the Graph command Note In this example the Graph command displays the Graph screen in place of the Home screen 6 Press and select 2 Clear split to return to a full screen T...

Страница 665: ...by entering the equation that you want to solve Displaying the Numeric Solver Displaying the Numeric Solver Displaying the Numeric Solver Displaying the Numeric Solver Entering an Equation Entering an Equation Entering an Equation Entering an Equation To display the Numeric Solver press O and then select the Numeric Solver icon Press The Numeric Solver screen shows the last entered equation if any...

Страница 666: ... Solver you then would enter y1 x 0 or y1 t 0 etc Type an expression without an sign Note When you define the variables you can either define exp or solve for it e fNln g After you press the expression is set equal to a system variable called exp and entered as exp e fNln g Recall a previously entered equation or open a saved equation Note After you press the current equation is stored automatical...

Страница 667: ... 1 From the Numeric Solver screen press à A dialog box displays the most recently entered equation 2 Select an equation To select the displayed equation press To select a different equation press B to display a list Then select the one you want Note You can specify how many equations are retained From the Numeric Solver press and select 9 Format or use H 8 F Then select a number from 1 through 11 ...

Страница 668: ...quation variable has an EXPR data type as shown on the MEMORY and VAR LINK screens Opening a Saved Equation Opening a Saved Equation Opening a Saved Equation Opening a Saved Equation To store the current equation for future use save it to a variable 1 From the Numeric Solver screen press and select 2 Save Copy As 2 Specify a folder and a variable name for the equation 3 Press twice To open a previ...

Страница 669: ...riables Defining the List of Variables 2 Select the applicable folder and equation variable 3 Press After typing your equation on the eqn line press or D The screen lists the variables in the order they appear in the equation If a variable is already defined its value is shown You can edit these variable values Note If an existing variable is locked or archived you cannot edit its value Variable e...

Страница 670: ...lue it cannot be undefined As an expression it is evaluated when you move the cursor off the line The expression must evaluate to a real number If the equation contains a variable already defined in terms of other variables those other variables are listed Note When you assign a value to a variable in the Numeric Solver that variable is defined globally It still exists after you leave the solver S...

Страница 671: ... not listed The solver uses the system variable s existing value Note You cannot solve for a system variable other than exp Also if the equation contains a system variable you cannot use to graph Although you can use a system variable in the equation an error occurs if you use to graph the solution If f a b was defined previously as a 2 b 2 and your equation contains f x y then x and y are listed ...

Страница 672: ...cifying an Initial Guess and or Bounds Optional To find a solution more quickly or to find a particular solution if multiple solutions exist you can optionally If you see the error shown to the right delete the entered variable value Then edit the equation to use a different variable Note This error occurs if you use a reserved name incorrectly or refer to an undefined system function as a simple ...

Страница 673: ...e Solving for the Unknown Variable Solving for the Unknown Variable Solving for the Unknown Variable After you type an equation in the Numeric Solver and enter values for the known variables you are ready to solve for the unknown variable Finding the Solution Finding the Solution Finding the Solution Finding the Solution With all known variables defined 1 Move the cursor to the unknown variable 2 ...

Страница 674: ...s error occurs Graphing the Solution Graphing the Solution Graphing the Solution Graphing the Solution You can graph an equation s solutions any time after defining the known variables either before or after you solve for the unknown variable By graphing the solutions you can If you Do this Want to solve for other values Edit the equation or variable values Want to find a different solution for an...

Страница 675: ...lect 1 Graph View or 3 ZoomStd or 4 ZoomFit The graph is shown in a split screen where The unknown variable is plotted on the x axis leftNrt is plotted on the y axis Solutions for the equation exist at leftNrt 0 where the graph crosses the x axis Note For more information refer to the Split Screens module Graph View uses the current Window variable values For information about ZoomStd and ZoomFit ...

Страница 676: ... to these settings Note If you were previously using different mode settings you will need to reselect those settings manually All stat plots are deselected After you leave the Numeric Solver the Graph screen may continue to display the equation s solution ignoring any selected Y functions If so display the Y Editor and then return to the Graph screen Also the graph is reset when you change the Gr...

Страница 677: ...urning to a Full Screen Returning to a Full Screen From the split screen To display the Numeric Solver full screen use 2 a to make the solver screen active press and then select 2 Clear Graph View or To display the Home screen press 2 K twice 2 Use 2 a to make the Numeric Solver screen active 3 Make sure the cursor is on the unknown variable and press Note Cursor coordinate xc is the unknown varia...

Страница 678: ...s variables still exist after you leave the Numeric Solver If the equation contains single character variables their values may inadvertently affect later symbolic calculations Before leaving the Numeric Solver you may want to 1 Press H ˆ to clear all single character variables in the current folder 2 Press to confirm the action The screen returns to the solver s eqn line Note Any time you want to...

Страница 679: ...g a Binary or Hexadecimal Number To enter a binary number use the form To enter a hexadecimal number use the form Note You can type the b or h in the prefix as well as hex characters A F in uppercase or lowercase If you enter a number without the 0b or 0h prefix such as 11 it is always treated as a decimal number If you omit the 0h prefix on a hexadecimal number containing A F all or part of the e...

Страница 680: ...Bin integerExpression 4 Dec integerExpression 4 Hex For 4 press 2 4 Also you can select base conversions from the MATH Base menu For example to convert 256 from decimal to binary 256 4 Bin Note If your entry is not an integer a Domain error is displayed To convert 101110 from binary to hexadecimal 0b101110 4 Hex Instead of using 4 you can 1 Use 3 to set the Base mode to the base that you want to c...

Страница 681: ...ording to the Base mode However results are restricted to certain size limits when Base HEX or BIN Setting the Base Mode for Displayed Results Setting the Base Mode for Displayed Results Setting the Base Mode for Displayed Results Setting the Base Mode for Displayed Results 2 From the Home screen type the number that you want to convert using the correct prefix and press 1 Press 3 to display Page ...

Страница 682: ...ust always use the 0h or 0b prefix to enter a hex or binary number Fractional and floating point results are always shown in decimal form When Base HEX or BIN a division result is displayed in hexadecimal or binary form only if the result is an integer To ensure that division always produces an integer use intDiv instead of e If Base mode HEX 0h prefix in result identifies the base Press 8 to disp...

Страница 683: ...ample 0h80000000 through 0hFFFFFFFF become negative numbers Comparing or Manipulating Bits Comparing or Manipulating Bits Comparing or Manipulating Bits Comparing or Manipulating Bits The following operators and functions let you compare or manipulate bits in a binary number You can enter an integer in any number base Your entries are converted to binary automatically for the bitwise operation and...

Страница 684: ...omparison the result is 1 if either bit is 1 the result is 0 only if both bits are 0 The returned value represents the bit results integer1 xor integer2 In a bit by bit xor comparison the result is 1 if either bit but not both is 1 the result is 0 if both bits are 0 or both bits are 1 The returned value represents the bit results Suppose you enter 0h7AC36 and 0h3D5F Internally the hexadecimal inte...

Страница 685: ...with syntax Description rotate integer or rotate integer ofRotations If ofRotations is omitted bits rotate once to the right default is L1 negative bits rotate the specified number of times to the right positive bits rotate the specified number of times to the left In a right rotation the rightmost bit rotates to the leftmost bit vice versa for a left rotation 0h7AC36 and 0h3D5F 0b0000000000000111...

Страница 686: ...r of times to the left In a right shift the rightmost bit is dropped and 0 or 1 is inserted to match the leftmost bit In a left shift the leftmost bit is dropped and 0 is inserted as the rightmost bit Suppose you enter shift 0h7AC36 Internally the hexadecimal integer is converted to a signed 32 bit binary number Then the shift is applied to the binary number Function with syntax Description If Bas...

Страница 687: ...be stored in a signed 32 bit binary form a symmetric modulo operation brings the value into the range 7AC36 0b00000000000001111010110000110110 Inserts 0 if leftmost bit is 0 or 1 if leftmost bit is 1 Dropped Each bit shifts to the right b00000000000000111101011000011011 0h3D61B Leading zeros are not shown in the result ...

Страница 688: ...o reset the memory Displaying the MEMORY Screen Displaying the MEMORY Screen Displaying the MEMORY Screen Displaying the MEMORY Screen Press 2 The numbers on your MEMORY screen may vary from those shown Prgm Asn Includes programs written for the Voyage 200 as well as any assembly language programs you have loaded History Size of history pairs saved in the Home screen s history area FlashApp Size o...

Страница 689: ...Select the applicable item Item Description RAM 1 All RAM Resetting RAM erases all data and programs from RAM 2 Default Resets all system variables and modes to their original factory settings This does not affect any user defined variables functions or folders Flash ROM 1 Archive Resetting Archive erases all data and programs from Flash ROM 2 Flash Apps Resetting Flash Apps erases all Flash appli...

Страница 690: ...e the variables and or folders Displaying the VAR LINK Screen Displaying the VAR LINK Screen Displaying the VAR LINK Screen Displaying the VAR LINK Screen Press 2 By default the VAR LINK screen lists all user defined variables in all folders and with all data types Ê Folder names alphabetically listed Ë Shows installed Flash applications Ì Size in bytes Í Data type Î Variable names alphabetically ...

Страница 691: ...s that start with that letter the cursor moves to highlight the first of those variable names Note Type a letter repeatedly to cycle through the names that start with that letter 6 Expanded folder view to right of folder name 6 You can scroll for more variables and or folders in bottom left corner of screen Ÿ If selected with Œ Locked û Archived This Indicates this ...

Страница 692: ...g the VAR LINK Screen Closing the VAR LINK Screen Closing the VAR LINK Screen To close the VAR LINK screen and return to the current application use or N as described below Type Description ASM Assembly language program DATA Data EXPR Expression includes numeric values FUNC Function GDB Graph database LIST List MAT Matrix PIC Picture of a graph PRGM Program STR String TEXT Text Editor session Pres...

Страница 693: ...e if a variable is archived use the IsArchiv function IsArchiv var_name To determine if a variable is locked use the IsLocked function IsLocked var_name Manipulating Variables and Folders with VAR LINK Manipulating Variables and Folders with VAR LINK Manipulating Variables and Folders with VAR LINK Manipulating Variables and Folders with VAR LINK On the VAR LINK screen you can show the contents of...

Страница 694: ... You cannot edit the contents from this screen Selecting Items from the List Selecting Items from the List Selecting Items from the List Selecting Items from the List For other operations select one or more variables and or folders 2 Press ˆ If you highlight a folder the screen shows the number of variables in that folder To select Do this A single variable or folder Move the cursor to highlight t...

Страница 695: ...the current folder all variables are stored in the MAIN folder by default A system variable or a variable with a reserved name can be stored in the MAIN folder only All folders and all variables Press B to expand the folder then press All and select 1 Select All Choosing 3 Select Current selects the last set of items transmitted to your unit during the current VAR LINK session Choosing 4 Expand Al...

Страница 696: ...defined variable in any existing folder The user defined variables in one folder are independent of the variables in any other folder Therefore folders can store separate sets of variables with the same names but different values You cannot create a folder within another folder MAIN System variables User defined a 1 b 2 c 3 f x x x x ALG102 User defined b 5 c 100 f x sin x cos x DAVE User defined ...

Страница 697: ...ting a Folder from the VAR LINK Screen 1 Press 2 3 Type a unique folder name up to eight characters and press twice After you create a new folder from VAR LINK that folder is not automatically set as the current folder Creating a Folder from the Home Screen Creating a Folder from the Home Screen Creating a Folder from the Home Screen Creating a Folder from the Home Screen Enter the NewFold command...

Страница 698: ...Box Setting the Current Folder from the MODE Dialog Box Setting the Current Folder from the MODE Dialog Box Setting the Current Folder from the MODE Dialog Box 1 Press 3 4 Select the applicable folder Either Highlight the folder name and press or Press the corresponding number or letter for that folder 5 Press to save your changes and close the dialog box 2 Highlight the Current Folder setting 3 P...

Страница 699: ...d or folders 2 Press ƒ Manage and select 3 Rename Using Variables in Different Folders Using Variables in Different Folders Using Variables in Different Folders Using Variables in Different Folders You can access a user defined variable or function that is not in the current folder Specify the complete pathname instead of only the variable name A pathname has the form folderName variableName or fo...

Страница 700: ...Specified Folder and or Variable Type or Flash Listing Only a Specified Folder and or Variable Type or Flash Listing Only a Specified Folder and or Variable Type or Flash Listing Only a Specified Folder and or Variable Type or Flash application application application application If you have a lot of variables folders or Flash applications it may be difficult to locate a particular variable By cha...

Страница 701: ...Highlight the setting you want to change and press B This displays a menu of valid choices To cancel a menu press N View Allows you to choose variables Flash applications or system variables to view Note To list system variables window variables etc select 3 System Folder Always lists 1 All and 2 main but lists other folders only if you have created them Var Type Lists the valid variable types ind...

Страница 702: ...fferent name in the same folder use 9 such as a1 a2 or the CopyVar command from the Home screen Locking or Unlocking Variables Folders or Flash Applications Locking or Unlocking Variables Folders or Flash Applications Locking or Unlocking Variables Folders or Flash Applications Locking or Unlocking Variables Folders or Flash Applications When a variable is locked you cannot delete rename or store ...

Страница 703: ...Screen When you delete a folder from the VAR LINK screen all of the variables in that folder are also deleted You cannot delete the MAIN folder Œ indicates a locked variable or folder in RAM û indicates an archived variable which is locked automatically 1 Press 2 2 Press to select the folder s to delete The folder s variables become selected automatically 3 Press ƒ 1 Delete or 0 4 Press to confirm...

Страница 704: ...eletes all variables of the specified type in all folders To delete an empty folder enter the DelFold command on the calculator Home screen DelFold folder1 folder2 folder3 Note You cannot delete the MAIN folder Pasting a Variable Name to an Application Pasting a Variable Name to an Application Pasting a Variable Name to an Application Pasting a Variable Name to an Application Suppose you are typin...

Страница 705: ...t cursor location in many Flash applications Procedure Procedure Procedure Procedure Starting from an application listed above 1 Position the cursor where you want to insert the variable name 2 Press 2 3 Highlight the applicable variable Note You can also highlight and paste folder names 4 Press to paste the variable name Note This pastes the variable s name not its contents Use 2 instead of 2 to ...

Страница 706: ...Would You Want to Archive a Variable The user data archive lets you Store data programs or any other variables to a safe location where they cannot be edited or deleted inadvertently Create additional free RAM by archiving variables For example You can archive variables that you need to access but do not need to edit or change or variables that you are not using currently but need to retain for fu...

Страница 707: ... name Note To select a single variable highlight it To select multiple variables highlight each variable and press Ÿ You can access an archived variable just as you would any locked variable For all purposes an archived variable is still in its original folder it is simply stored in the user data archive instead of RAM Note An archived variable is locked automatically You can access the variable b...

Страница 708: ...age This occurs if you try to archive a variable when there is not enough free archive memory However the Voyage 200 will attempt to rearrange the archived variables to make additional room Responding to the Garbage Collection Message Responding to the Garbage Collection Message Responding to the Garbage Collection Message Responding to the Garbage Collection Message Note If batteries are low repl...

Страница 709: ... Cancel the archive and investigate the reason Why Is Garbage Collection Necessary Why Is Garbage Collection Necessary Why Is Garbage Collection Necessary Why Is Garbage Collection Necessary The user data archive is divided into sectors When you first begin archiving variables are stored consecutively in sector 1 This continues to the end of the sector If there is not enough space left in the sect...

Страница 710: ...r than any empty block How Unarchiving a Variable Affects the Process How Unarchiving a Variable Affects the Process How Unarchiving a Variable Affects the Process How Unarchiving a Variable Affects the Process When you unarchive a variable it is copied to RAM but it is not actually deleted from user data archive memory variable B variable C variable A variable D Depending on its size variable D i...

Страница 711: ... to archive a variable you may still get a Garbage Collection message The Voyage 200 has 2 7 MB of user available Flash ROM memory All 2 7 MB can be used for Flash Apps but only approximately 1 MB of it can be used for user data archive The Garbage Collection Process The Garbage Collection Process The Garbage Collection Process The Garbage Collection Process The garbage collection process Deletes ...

Страница 712: ...you try to access an archived variable What Causes the Memory Error What Causes the Memory Error What Causes the Memory Error What Causes the Memory Error The Memory Error message is displayed if there is not enough free RAM to access the archived variable This may cause you to ask If the variable is in the user data archive why does it matter how much RAM is available The answer is that the follo...

Страница 713: ... the copy from RAM when the program is finished The error message is displayed if there is not enough free RAM for the temporary copy Note Except for programs and functions referring to an archived variable does not copy it If variable ab is archived it is not copied if you perform 6ùab Correcting the Error Correcting the Error Correcting the Error Correcting the Error To free up enough RAM to acc...

Страница 714: ...Memory and Variable Management 714 Archiving large variables or programs moving them from RAM to the user data archive Note Typically the RAM free size must be larger than the archived variable ...

Страница 715: ...tor s I O port with this cable Connecting before Sending or Receiving Connecting before Sending or Receiving Connecting before Sending or Receiving Connecting before Sending or Receiving Using firm pressure insert one end of the cable into the link port of each unit Either unit can send or receive depending on how you set them up from the VAR LINK screen You can link a TI 89 Titanium or Voyage 200...

Страница 716: ...tions and Transmitting Variables Flash Applications and Transmitting Variables Flash Applications and Folders Folders Folders Folders Transmitting variables is a convenient way to share any variable listed on the VAR LINK screen functions programs etc You can also transmit Flash applications Apps and folders I O Port I O Port I O unit to unit cable ...

Страница 717: ...Connect two graphing calculators using the appropriate cable 2 On the sending unit press 2 to display the VAR LINK screen 3 On the sending unit select the variables folders or Flash applications you want to send To select a single variable Flash application or folder move the cursor to highlight it and press to place a checkmark Ÿ beside it If on the default VAR LINK screen this selects the folder...

Страница 718: ...ct multiple variables Flash applications or folders highlight each one and press to place a checkmark Ÿ beside it Use again to deselect any that you do not want to transmit To select all variables Flash applications or folders use All 1 Select All 4 On the receiving unit press 2 to display the VAR LINK screen The sending unit remains on the VAR LINK screen 5 On both the receiving and the sending u...

Страница 719: ...Flash Applications or Folders Rules for Transmitting Variables Flash Applications or Folders Rules for Transmitting Variables Flash Applications or Folders Unlocked and unarchived variables that have the same name on both the sending and receiving units will be overwritten from the sending unit Locked variables that have the same name on both the sending and receiving units must be unlocked on the...

Страница 720: ...le The variable is transmitted to the current folder and it remains archived on the receiving unit Unlocked Flash application If the receiving unit has the correct certification the Flash application is transmitted It remains unlocked on the receiving unit Locked Flash application If the receiving unit has the correct certification the Flash application is transmitted It remains locked on the rece...

Страница 721: ...and Notification Messages 1 Press An error message is displayed 2 Press N or Shown on Message and Description Sending unit This is displayed after several seconds if A cable is not attached to the sending unit s link port or A receiving unit is not attached to the other end of the cable or The receiving unit is not set up to receive Press N or to cancel the transmission Note The sending unit may n...

Страница 722: ...being sent To overwrite the existing variable press By default Overwrite YES To store the variable to a different name set Overwrite NO In the New Name input box type a variable name that does not exist in the receiving unit Then press twice To skip this variable and continue with the next one set Overwrite SKIP and press To cancel the transmission press N Shown on Message and Description New Name...

Страница 723: ...ents Collapsed folders become expanded when selected If selecting a Flash App from the F7 tab this selects the App folder and its contents A checkmark appears beside the folder but not beside the contents Collapsed Flash App folders do not automatically become expanded Note You cannot delete the Main folder To select multiple variables Flash applications or folders highlight each one and press to ...

Страница 724: ... Instruments Web site at education ti com You can download a Flash application and or certificate from the Texas Instruments Web site to a computer and use a USB Silver Edition cable to install the application or certificate on your Voyage 200 Graphing Calculator For Flash App installation instructions see education ti com guides Transmitting Variables under Program Control Transmitting Variables ...

Страница 725: ...ake turns sending and receiving displaying a variable named msg InputStr lets each user enter a message in the msg variable Chat Prgm ClrIO Disp On first unit to send enter 1 On first to receive InputStr enter 0 msg If msg 0 Then While true GetCalc msg Disp msg InputStr msg SendCalc msg EndWhile Else While true InputStr msg SendCalc msg GetCalc msg Disp msg EndWhile EndIf EndPrgm Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï ...

Страница 726: ...endCalc the loops are arranged so that the receiving unit executes GetCalc while the sending unit is waiting for the user to enter a message Running the Program Running the Program Running the Program Running the Program This procedure assumes that The two devices are linked with the connecting cable The Chat program is loaded on both devices Use each device s Program Editor to enter the program o...

Страница 727: ...rating System OS Upgrading the Operating System OS Upgrading the Operating System OS Upgrading the Operating System OS You can upgrade the OS on your Voyage 200 using your computer You can also transfer the OS from one unit to another identical model for example from a TI 89 Titanium to a TI 89 Titanium or from a Voyage 200 to a Voyage 200 Installing OS software resets all device memory to the ori...

Страница 728: ...ssages and status information related to new functionality in the OS may not display correctly When in OS download mode the Automatic Power Down APD feature does not function If you leave your device in download mode for an extended time before you actually start the downloading process your batteries may become depleted You will then need to replace the depleted batteries with new batteries befor...

Страница 729: ...re to Get Operating System Upgrades Where to Get Operating System Upgrades Where to Get Operating System Upgrades For up to date information about available OS upgrades check the Texas Instruments Web site at education ti com downloadticonnect You can download an OS upgrade Localizer or Flash application from the Texas Instruments Web site to a computer and use a USB Silver Edition cable to instal...

Страница 730: ...s VAR LINK WAITING TO RECEIVE and BUSY in the status line of the receiving unit 5 On the sending unit select 4 Send OS A warning message displays Press N to halt the process or press to start the transmission Important For each receiving unit remember to back up information as necessary and install new batteries Be sure both the sending and receiving units are in the VAR LINK screen During the tra...

Страница 731: ...ading the Operating System on Multiple Units If You are Upgrading the Operating System on Multiple Units To perform an OS upgrade on multiple units download and install the OS into one unit and then transfer the OS upgrade from one unit to another This method is faster than installing it on each unit via a computer OS upgrades are released free of charge and you do not need to obtain a certificate...

Страница 732: ...evice IDs for group purchase of commercial applications After the IDs are collected transmit them to Texas Instruments so a group certificate can be issued The certificate on the receiving unit is not valid for the operating system OS or App on the sending unit You must obtain and install a valid certificate If the App no longer requires a certificate you can download it again from the Texas Instr...

Страница 733: ...ations to a group certificate Collecting ID Lists Collecting ID Lists Collecting ID Lists Collecting ID Lists You can use one device to collect all of the IDs or use several collection units and then consolidate their ID lists onto one device To send an ID number from one device to another first connect two units by using a USB unit to unit cable or I O unit to unit cable Step On the Do this 1 Col...

Страница 734: ...D List The ID list remains on the collection device after it is uploaded to the computer You can then use the collection device to upload the list to other computers To clear the ID list from the collection unit The sending unit adds a copy of its unique ID number to the collection unit s ID list The sending unit always retains its own ID number which cannot be deleted from the device 3 Additional...

Страница 735: ... and the TI 89 are similar except that the TI 89 Titanium has more memory more room for Apps and user archive and the TI 89 Titanium has a USB port The Voyage 200 is the same as the TI 92 Plus except it has more memory and thus more room for applications Apps All data is compatible among the TI 89 Titanium TI 89 Voyage 200 and TI 92 Plus but some programs written for one may not run or may not run...

Страница 736: ...ble To From TI 89 Titanium TI 89 Voyage 2 00 TI 92 Plus TI 89 Titanium OS Apps Variables Apps Variables Variables Variables TI 89 Apps Variables OS Apps Variables Variables Variables Voyage 2 00 Variables Variables OS Apps Variables Apps Variables TI 92 Plus Variables Variables Apps Variables OS Apps Variables ...

Страница 737: ...d the corner without tilting the pole Maximum Length of Pole in Hallway Maximum Length of Pole in Hallway Maximum Length of Pole in Hallway Maximum Length of Pole in Hallway The maximum length of a pole c is the shortest line segment touching the interior corner and opposite sides of the two hallways as shown in the diagram below Use proportional sides and the Pythagorean theorem to find the lengt...

Страница 738: ...te When you want to define a function use multiple character names as you build the definition 2 Define the expression for side b in terms of w and store it in b w 3 Define the expression for side c in terms of w and store it in c w Enter Define c w a w 2 b w 2 10 5 w a b c a w 5 b 10a w ...

Страница 739: ... to compute the zeros of the first derivative of c w to find the minimum value of c w Note The maximum length of the pole is the minimum value of c w 5 Compute the exact maximum length of the pole Enter c 2 6 Compute the approximate maximum length of the pole Result Approximately 20 8097 feet Note Use the auto paste feature to copy the result from step 4 to the entry line inside the parentheses of...

Страница 740: ...e the Quadratic Formula Perform the following steps to derive the quadratic formula by completing the square of the generalized quadratic equation 1 Clear all one character variables in the current folder ˆ Choose 1 Clear a z and press to confirm 2 On the Home screen enter the generalized quadratic equation ax2 bx c 0 3 Subtract c from both sides of the equation 2 C Note This example uses the resu...

Страница 741: ...inue to use the last answer 2 as in step 3 in steps 4 through 9 5 Use the expand function to expand the result of the last answer 6 Complete the square by adding b a 2 2 to both sides of the equation 7 Factor the result using the factor function 8 Multiply both sides of the equation by 4a2 ...

Страница 742: ...ws you how to perform several matrix operations 9 Take the square root of both sides of the equation with the constraint that a 0 and b 0 and x 0 10 Solve for x by subtracting b from both sides and then dividing by 2a Note This is only one of the two general quadratic solutions due to the constraint in step 9 ...

Страница 743: ...to set the random number generator seed to the factory default and then use randMat to create a random 3x3 matrix and store it in a 2 Replace the 2 3 element of the matrix with the variable x and then use the augment function to augment the 3x3 identity to a and store the result in b 3 Use rref to row reduce matrix b The result will have the identity matrix in the first three columns and a L1 in t...

Страница 744: ...ph Plot Method 1 Graph Plot Perform the following steps to observe where the graphs of the functions y1 x cos x and y2 x sin x intersect 4 Solve for the value of x that will cause the inverse of the matrix to be invalid Enter solve getDenom 2 1 4 0 x Result x L70 17 Note Use the cursor in the history area to scroll the result 1 In the Y Editor set y1 x cos x and y2 x sin x 2 In the Window Editor s...

Страница 745: ...spond to the screen prompts to select the two curves and the lower and upper bounds for intersection A 5 Note the x and y coordinates Repeat steps 4 and 5 to find the other intersections 1 On the Home screen enter solve sin x cos x x The solution for x is where n1 is any integer 2 Using the ceiling and floor functions find the ceiling and floor values for the intersection points as shown Note Move...

Страница 746: ...e Area of a Parallelepiped Exploring a 3D Graph of the Surface Area of a Parallelepiped Exploring a 3D Graph of the Surface Area of a Parallelepiped Exploring a 3D Graph of the Surface Area of a Parallelepiped Perform the following steps to define a function for the surface area of a parallelepiped draw a 3D graph and use the Trace tool to find a point close to the minimum surface area 3 Enter the...

Страница 747: ...solve the problem analytically on the Home screen 2 Select the 3D Graph mode Then enter the function for z1 x y as shown in this example with volume v 300 3 Set the Window variables to eye 60 90 0 x 0 15 15 y 0 15 15 z 260 300 ncontour 5 4 Graph the function and use Trace to go to the point close to the minimum value of the surface area function 1 Solve for x and y in terms of v Enter solve d sa x...

Страница 748: ...unning a Tutorial Script Running a Tutorial Script Perform the following steps to write a script using the Text Editor test each line and observe the results in the history area on the Home screen Note The command symbol C is accessed from the 1 Command toolbar menu 2 Find the minimum surface area when the value of v equals 300 Enter 300 v Enter sa v 1 3 v 1 3 v Note Press to obtain the exact resu...

Страница 749: ...able on a b define f x x 3N2x 2 xN7 1 a 3 22 b d f x x df x zeros df x x f ans 1 f a b The largest number from the previous two commands is the maximum value of the function The smallest number is the minimum value 3 Press and select 1 Script view to show the Text Editor and the Home screen on a split screen Move the cursor to the first line in the Text Editor ...

Страница 750: ... quotient and remainder Detailed information about the steps used in this example can be found in Basic Function Graphing and Symbolic Manipulation 4 Press repeatedly to execute each line in the script one at a time Note Press and select 2 Clear split to go back to a full sized Text Editor screen 5 To see the results of the script on a full sized screen go to the Home screen Note Press 2 K twice t...

Страница 751: ...ion f x Enter x 3N10x 2Nx 50 xN2 f x Note Actual entries are displayed in reverse type in the example screens 2 Use the proper fraction function propFrac to split the function into a quotient and remainder 3 Copy the last answer to the entry line or Enter 16 xN2 x 2N8 xN17 Note Move the cursor into the history area to highlight the last answer Press to copy it to the entry line 4 Edit the last ans...

Страница 752: ...hick graphing style for y2 x 6 Add the original function f x to y3 x and select the square graphing style 7 In the Window Editor set the window variables to x L10 15 10 y L100 100 10 8 Draw the graph Note Be sure the Graph mode is set to Function ...

Страница 753: ... positive and negative directions Studying Statistics Filtering Data by Categories Studying Statistics Filtering Data by Categories Studying Statistics Filtering Data by Categories Studying Statistics Filtering Data by Categories This activity provides a statistical study of the weights of high school students using categories to filter the data The lower graph is y3 x f x graphed separately using...

Страница 754: ... in the Data Matrix Editor Table 1 Category vs Description Category C2 Academic Year and Sex 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Freshman boys Freshman girls Sophomore boys Sophomore girls Junior boys Junior girls Senior boys Senior girls Table 2 C1 weight of each student in pounds vs C2 category C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2 110 125 105 120 140 85 80 90 80 95 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 115 135 110 130 150 90 95 85 100 95 3 3 3 3...

Страница 755: ...Matrix Editor and create a new Data variable named students 2 Enter the data and categories from Table 2 into columns c1 and c2 respectively 3 Open the Plot Setup toolbar menu Note Set up several box plots to compare different subsets of the entire data set 4 Define the plot and filter parameters for Plot 1 as shown in this screen ...

Страница 756: ...y the Include Categories item for Plot 2 through Plot 5 to the following Plot 2 1 2 freshman boys girls Plot 3 7 8 senior boys girls Plot 4 1 3 5 7 all boys Plot 5 2 4 6 8 all girls 8 In the Y Editor deselect any functions that may be selected from a previous activity Note Only Plot 1 through Plot 5 should be selected ...

Страница 757: ... can use your computer keyboard to type lengthy text and then use TI Connect software to send it to the calculator More CBL 2 programs are available from the TI Web site at educaton ti com 9 Display the plots by pressing and selecting 9 Zoomdata 10 Use the Trace tool to compare the median student weights for different subsets Ê median all students Ë all students Ì all freshmen Í all seniors Î all ...

Страница 758: ...99 xmax 10 xscl Set up the Window variables L20 ymin 100 ymax 10 yscl 0 data Create and or clear a list named data 0 time Create and or clear a list named time Send 1 0 Send a command to clear the CBL 2 unit Send 1 2 1 Set up Chan 2 of the CBL 2 to AutoID to record temp Disp Press ENTER to start Prompt the user to press Disp graphingTemperature Pause Wait until the user is ready to start PtText TE...

Страница 759: ...ametric graph and a table at the same time to study the flight of a hit baseball Send 3 1 L1 0 Send the Trigger command to the CBL 2 collect data in real time For i 1 99 Repeat next two instructions for 99 temperature readings Get data i Get a temperature from the CBL 2 and store it in a list PtOn i data i Plot the temperature data on a graph EndFor seq i i 1 99 1 time Create a list to represent t...

Страница 760: ... an initial velocity of 95 feet per second and an initial angle of 32 degrees 1 Set the modes for Page 1 as shown in this screen 2 Set the modes for Page 2 as shown in this screen 3 In the Y Editor on the left side enter the equation for the distance of the ball at time t for xt1 t xt1 t 95 t cos 32 Note Press 2 to obtain the degree symbol 4 In the Y Editor enter the equation for the height of the...

Страница 761: ...isplay the TABLE SETUP dialog box and change tblStart to 0 and tbl to 0 1 Note Press 8 8 Display the table in the left side and press D to highlight t 2 Note Press 8 9 Switch to the right side Press and trace the graph to show the values of xc and yc when tc 2 Note As you move the trace cursor from tc 0 0 to tc 3 1 you will see the position of the ball at time tc ...

Страница 762: ...the complex zeros of a cubic polynomial Visualizing Complex Roots Visualizing Complex Roots Visualizing Complex Roots Visualizing Complex Roots Perform the following steps to expand the cubic polynomial xN1 xNi x i find the absolute value of the function graph the modulus surface and use the Trace tool to explore the modulus surface 1 On the Home screen use the expand function to expand the cubic ...

Страница 763: ...the x axis Likewise the absolute value of a function of two variables will force any roots to visually just touch the xy plane 4 Copy and paste the last answer to the entry line and store it in the function z1 x y Note The graph of z1 x y will be the modulus surface 5 Set the unit to 3D graph mode turn on the axes for graph format and set the Window variables to eye 20 70 0 x L2 2 20 y L2 2 20 z L...

Страница 764: ... Calculating and drawing the graph takes about three minutes 7 Graph the modulus surface The 3D graph is used to visually display a picture of the roots where the surface touches the xy plane 8 Use the Trace tool to explore the function values at x 1 and y 0 9 Use the Trace tool to explore the function values at x 0 and y 1 ...

Страница 765: ...points where the graph of the modulus surface touches the xy plane Solving a Standard Annuity Problem Solving a Standard Annuity Problem Solving a Standard Annuity Problem Solving a Standard Annuity Problem This activity can be used to find the interest rate starting principal number of compounding periods and future value of an annuity 10 Use the Trace tool to explore the function values at x 0 a...

Страница 766: ... of an annuity where the starting principal p is 1 000 number of compounding periods n is 6 and the future value s is 2 000 1 On the Home screen enter the equation to solve for p 2 Enter the equation to solve for n 3 Enter the equation to solve for i using the with operator solve s p 1 i n i s 2000 and p 1000 and n 6 Result The interest rate is 12 246 Note To enter the with operator 2 K Press 8 to...

Страница 767: ...financing an item Detailed information about the steps used in this example can be found in the electronic chapter Programming which is available from the TI Web site at education ti com and on the CD in this package Time Value of Money Function Time Value of Money Function Time Value of Money Function Time Value of Money Function In the Program Editor define the following Time Value of Money tvm ...

Страница 768: ...mp4 temp5 temp6 Func Local tempi tempfunc tempstr1 Ltemp3 1 temp2 1200 temp6 temp4 1N 1 temp2 1200 Ltemp1 temp2 1200 Ntemp5 1 temp2 1200 Ltemp1 tempfunc For tempi 1 5 1 temp exact string tempi tempstr1 If when tempstr1 0 false false true Then If tempi 2 Return approx nsolve tempfunc 0 tempstr1 tempstr1 0 and tempstr1 100 Return approx nsolve tempfunc 0 tempstr1 EndIf EndFor Return parameter error ...

Страница 769: ...y off the loan if you could make a 300 payment each month Finding Rational Real and Complex Factors Finding Rational Real and Complex Factors Finding Rational Real and Complex Factors Finding Rational Real and Complex Factors This activity shows how to find rational real or complex factors of expressions Detailed information about the steps used in this example can be found in Symbolic Manipulatio...

Страница 770: ...ing Factors Finding Factors Enter the expressions shown below on the Home screen 1 factor x 3N5x displays a rational result 2 factor x 3 5x displays a rational result 3 factor x 3N5x x displays a real result 4 cfactor x 3 5x x displays a complex result ...

Страница 771: ...r define drawball as a function that can be called with two parameters The first parameter is a list where each element is the number of balls of a certain color The second parameter is the number of balls to select This function returns a list where each element is the number of balls of each color that were selected drawball urnlist drawnum Func Local templist drawlist colordim numballs i pick u...

Страница 772: ... Using Vectors to Determine Velocity A small fishing boat leaves from the south bank of the Allegheny River and heads at an 80 angle with an engine speed of 20 knots However the eastward force of the current carries the boat along so it actually travels at a 60 angle with the shore How fast is the current and how fast does the boat actually travel 1 Enter a random seed using the RandSeed command 2...

Страница 773: ...g decimal point Press 3 D D D On the Angle option select 2 DEGREE On the Display Digits option select E FLOAT 2 Set the modes for Page 2 as shown in this screen Display answers in decimal form Press 3 D D On the Exact Approx option select 3 APPROXIMATE Actual Path Intended Path Boat Eastward Traveling Current a mph river bank ...

Страница 774: ... as i c and r Use the value a for the unknown speed of the current Use the value b for the speed of the boat Enter 20 80 i a 0 c b 60 r Vectors are commonly written in either polar or rectangular form so it is useful to convert polar vectors into rectangular form 4 Define function p2r Enter Define p2r x x 1 1 cos x 1 2 x 1 1 sin x 1 2 ...

Страница 775: ...ors are equal the x coordinate of i c must equal the x coordinate of the resultant vector r Likewise the y coordinate of i c must equal the y coordinate of resultant vector r 6 Set up two equations involving vectors i c and r Equation 1 sets the x coordinates equal to each other Equation 2 sets the y coordinates equal Store these equations into eq1 and eq2 respectively Enter i 1 1 c 1 1 r 1 1 eq1 ...

Страница 776: ... speed of the boat solve eq2 b 8 Substitute the known value of b into eq1 and solve eq1 for a to determine a the speed of the eastward traveling current solve eq1 a b The boat travels at a speed of 22 7 knots and the water current is approximately 7 9 knots ...

Страница 777: ...Activities 777 ...

Страница 778: ...cluded in the operating system OS See modules relating to calculator software applications Apps for functions and instructions specific to those Apps Circle CATALOG Circle x y r drawMode Draws a circle with its center at window coordinates x y and with a radius of r x y and r must be real values If drawMode 1 draws the circle default If drawMode 0 turns off the circle If drawMode 1 inverts pixels ...

Страница 779: ...6 PxlChg 856 PxlCrcl 856 PxlHorz 856 PxlLine 857 PxlOff 857 PxlOn 857 pxlTest 857 PxlText 857 PxlVert 858 RclGDB 861 RclPic 861 RplcPic 866 Shade 873 StoGDB 882 StoPic 883 Style 883 Trace 890 XorPic 894 ZoomBox 896 ZoomData 897 ZoomDec 897 ZoomFit 898 ZoomIn 898 ZoomInt 898 ZoomOut 899 ZoomPrev 899 ZoomRcl 899 ZoomSqr 899 ZoomStd 900 ZoomSto 900 ZoomTrig 900 add 900 ì subtract 901 ù multiply 901 à...

Страница 780: ...min 843 mod 843 nCr 844 nPr 847 P4 4 4 4Rx 850 P4 4 4 4Ry 850 r radian 909 R4 4 4 4Pq q q q 860 R4 4 4 4Pr 860 real 861 remain 863 rotate 864 round 865 sec 866 root 864 secê 867 sech 867 sechê 867 shift 874 sign 875 sin 876 sinê 876 sinh 877 sinhê 877 tan 886 tanê 886 tanh 887 tanhê 887 tmpCnv 889 tmpCnv 889 xê 911 add 900 ì subtract 901 ù multiply 901 à à à à divide 902 ë negate 904 dot add 903 d...

Страница 781: ...GetCalc 823 getConfg 823 getDate 823 getDtFmt 824 getDtStr 824 getFold 824 getKey 824 getMode 825 getTime 825 getTmFmt 825 getTmStr 825 getTmZn 826 getType 826 getUnits 826 Goto 827 If 828 Input 829 InputStr 830 isClkOn 831 Item 832 Lbl 832 isArchiv 831 isLocked 831 isVar 831 left 832 Local 837 Lock 837 Loop 839 MoveVar 843 NewFold 845 NewProb 846 not 847 or 849 Output 849 part 850 PassErr 852 Pau...

Страница 782: ...44 NewPlot 846 nPr 847 OneVar 848 PlotsOff 853 PlotsOn 853 PowerReg 854 QuadReg 859 QuartReg 859 rand 860 randNorm 861 RandSeed 861 ShowStat 875 SinReg 878 SortA 880 SortD 880 stdDev 881 stdDevPop 882 TwoVar 891 variance 892 append 907 indirection 909 char 790 dim 809 expr 817 format 821 inString 830 left 832 mid 842 ord 849 right 864 rotate 864 shift 874 string 883 Statistics Strings ...

Страница 783: ...returned value represents the bit results and is displayed according to the Base mode You can enter the integers in any number base For a binary or hexadecimal entry you must use the 0b or 0h prefix respectively Without a prefix integers are treated as decimal base 10 If you enter a decimal integer that is too large for a signed 32 bit binary form a symmetric modulo operation is used to bring the ...

Страница 784: ...sin x ˆStyle 3 Square y1 no checkmark F4 to deselect Zoom 7 ZoomTrig 8 AndPic PIC1 Done angle MATH Complex menu angle expression1 expression Returns the angle of expression1 interpreting expression1 as a complex number Note All undefined variables are treated as real variables InDegreeanglemode angle 0 2i 90 InGradiananglemode angle 0 3i 100 InRadiananglemode angle 1 i p 4 angle z angle x iy angle...

Страница 785: ...en possible approx sin p cos p 0 ë1 approx 2 3 1 414 1 732 Archive CATALOG Archive var1 var2 var3 Moves the specified variables from RAM to the user data archive memory You can access an archived variable the same as you would a variable in RAM However you cannot delete rename or store to an archived variable because it is locked automatically To unarchive variables use Unarchiv 10 arctest 10 Arch...

Страница 786: ... change expression1 can be a user defined function name see Func h is the step value If h is omitted it defaults to 0 001 Note that the similar function nDeriv uses the central difference quotient avgRC f x x h f x h f x h avgRC sin x x h x 2 sin h 2 sin 2 h avgRC x 2ìx 2 x 2 ø x 4995 avgRC x 2ìx 2 x 1 2 ø x 45 avgRC x 2ìx 2 x 3 2ø x 1 4 4 4 4Bin MATH Base menu integer1 4 4 4 4Bin integer Converts...

Страница 787: ... a graph refer to the module that describes that graphing mode InfunctiongraphingmodeandRadiananglemode 8ùsin x y1 x Done 2ùsin x y2 x Done ZoomStd BldData Done O 6 3D graphing mode has two independent variables In the sample data to the right notice that x remains constant as y increments through its range of values Then x increments to its next value and y again increments through its range This...

Страница 788: ...ncidental factoring with respect to other variables cFactor a 3ùx 2 aùx 2 a 3 a x aø añ 1 ø x ë i ø x i cFactor x 2 3 x x 3ø i ø x ë 3ø i cFactor x 2 a x x aøëi ø x aø i For the AUTO setting of the Exact Approx mode including var also permits approximation with floating point coefficients where irrational coefficients cannot be explicitly expressed concisely in terms of the built in functions Even...

Страница 789: ...awn While viewing the Graph screen you can clear all drawn items such as lines and points by pressing ReGraph or pressing ˆ and selecting 1 ClrDraw ClrErr CATALOG ClrErr Clears the error status It sets errornum to zero and clears the internal error context variables The Else clause of the Try EndTry in the program should use ClrErr or PassErr If the error is to be processed or ignored use ClrErr I...

Страница 790: ...eturn arbitrary constants or integers 1 2 etc ClrHome resets the suffix to 1 ClrIO CATALOG ClrIO Clears the Program I O screen ClrTable CATALOG ClrTable Clears all table values Applies only to the ASK setting on the Table Setup dialog box While viewing the Table screen in Ask mode you can clear the values by pressing ƒ and selecting 8 Clear Table colDim MATH Matrix Dimensions menu colDim matrix ex...

Страница 791: ...enom y 2 y x 1 2 y 2 y y If var does not occur in expression1 comDenom expression1 var returns a reduced ratio of an unexpanded numerator over an unexpanded denominator Such results usually save even more time memory and screen space Such partially factored results also make subsequent operations on the result much faster and much less likely to exhaust memory comDenom exprn abc comden exprn Don c...

Страница 792: ... non algebraic variable types such as Pic and GDB variables x y a x y 10 x 10 CopyVar a b Done a c y 10 DelVar x Done b x y c y 10 cos X key cos expression1 expression cos list1 list cos expression1 returns the cosine of the argument as an expression cos list1 returns a list of the cosines of all elements in list1 Note The result is returned as a degree gradian or radian angle according to the cur...

Страница 793: ...metic InRadiananglemode cos 1 5 3 4 2 1 6 ë 2 1 212 205 121 160 259 037 248 ë 090 218 cosê 2 R key cosê expression1 expression cosê list1 list cosê expression1 returns the angle whose cosine is expression1 as an expression cosê list1 returns a list of the inverse cosines of each element of list1 Note The result is returned as a degree gradian or radian angle according to the current angle mode set...

Страница 794: ... list coshê expression1 returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of the argument as an expression coshê list1 returns a list of the inverse hyperbolic cosines of each element of list1 coshê 1 0 coshê 1 2 1 3 0 1 372 coshê 3 coshê squareMatrix1 squareMatrix Returns the matrix inverse hyperbolic cosine of squareMatrix1 This is not the same as calculating the inverse hyperbolic cosine of each element Fo...

Страница 795: ...ns a list containing the inverse hyperbolic cotangents of each element of list1 cothL1 3 5 293 cothL1 L2 2 1 6 Lln 3 2 518 ln 7 5 2 crossP MATH Matrix Vector ops menu crossP list1 list2 list Returns the cross product of list1 and list2 as a list list1 and list2 must have equal dimension and the dimension must be either 2 or 3 crossP a1 b1 a2 b2 0 0 a1ø b2ì a2ø b1 crossP 0 1 2 2 ë 5 1 ë 5 0 ë 2 5 ë...

Страница 796: ...expression1 or returns a list containing the inverse hyperbolic cosecants of each element of list1 cschL1 1 sinh 1 1 cschL1 1 2 1 3 sinhL1 1 459 sinhL1 1 3 cSolve MATH Algebra Complex menu cSolve equation var Boolean expression Returns candidate complex solutions of an equation for var The goal is to produce candidates for all real and non real solutions Even if equation is real cSolve allows non ...

Страница 797: ...tions to the simultaneous algebraic equations where each varOrGuess specifies a variable that you want to solve for Optionally you can specify an initial guess for a variable Each varOrGuess must have the form variable or variable real or non real number For example x is valid and so is x 3 i If all of the equations are polynomials and if you do NOT specify any initial guesses cSolve uses the lexi...

Страница 798: ...r polynomial in all of its variables nor linear in its solution variables cSolve determines at most one solution using an approximate iterative method To do so the number of solution variables must equal the number of equations and all other variables in the equations must simplify to numbers cSolve e z_ w_ and w_ z_ 2 w_ z_ w_ 494 and z_ ë 703 A non real guess is often necessary to determine a no...

Страница 799: ...rogramlistingexample CustmOn CATALOG CustmOn Activates a custom toolbar that has already been set up in a Custom EndCustm block CustmOn and CustmOff enable a program to control a custom toolbar Manually you can press 2 to toggle a custom toolbar on and off SeeCustomprogramlistingexample Custom 2 key Custom block EndCustm Sets up a toolbar that is activated when you press 2 It is very similar to th...

Страница 800: ...es 4 andforwardandbackwards ë1 4 4 4 4Cylind MATH Matrix Vector ops menu vector 4 4 4 4Cylind Displays the row or column vector in cylindrical form r q z vector must have exactly three elements It can be either a row or a column 2 2 3 4Cylind 2ø 2 p 4 3 cZeros MATH Algebra Complex menu cZeros expression var list Returns a list of candidate real and non real values of var that make expression 0 cZe...

Страница 801: ... øi 1 2 3 2 øi 1 2 ì 3 2 øi 0 0 Extractrow2 ans 1 2 1 2 3 2 øi 1 2 ì 3 2 øi Simultaneous polynomials can have extra variables that have no values but represent given numeric values that could be substituted later cZeros u_ùv_ìu_ì c_ùv_ v_ 2 u_ u_ v_ ë 1ì 4øc_ 1 2 4 1ì 4øc_ 1 2 ë 1ì 4øc_ì 1 2 4 ë 1ì 4øc_ì 1 2 0 0 You can also include unknown variables that do not appear in the expressions These zer...

Страница 802: ...o these fully simplified arguments Instead d performs the following steps 1 Simplify the second argument only to the extent that it does not lead to a non variable 2 Simplify the first argument only to the extent that it does recall any stored value for the variable determined by step 1 3 Determine the symbolic derivative of the result of step 2 with respect to the variable from step 1 4 If the va...

Страница 803: ... 4DD matrix Returns the decimal equivalent of the argument expressed in degrees The argument is a number list or matrix that is interpreted by the Mode setting in gradians radians or degrees InDegreeanglemode 1 5ó 4DD 1 5ó 45ó 22 14 3 4DD 45 370 ó 45ó 22 14 3 60ó 0 0 4DD 45 370 60 InGradiananglemode 14DD 9 10 ó InRadiananglemode 1 5 4DD 85 9ó 4 4 4 4Dec MATH Base menu integer1 4 4 4 4Dec integer C...

Страница 804: ...can include expressions and instructions such as If Then Else and For This allows the function funcName to use the Return instruction to return a specific result Note It is usually easier to author and edit this form of Function in the program editor rather than on the entry line Define g x y Func If x y Then Return x Else Return y EndIf EndFunc Done g 3 ë 7 3 Define progName arg1Name arg2Name Prg...

Страница 805: ... order equation contains an arbitrary constant of the form k where k is an integer suffix from 1 through 255 The suffix resets to 1 when you use ClrHome or ƒ 8 Clear Home The solution of a 2nd order equation contains two such constants Note Totypeaprimesymbol press2 È deSolve y 2y y x 2 x y y 1øx 2 øeë x xñ ì 4øx 6 right ans 1 temp 1øx 2 øeë x xñ ì 4øx 6 d temp x 2 2ùd temp x tempìx 2 0 DelVar tem...

Страница 806: ...dependentVar initialIndependentValue initialDependentValue For initialCondition2 use the form dependentVar initialIndependentValue initial1stDerivativeValue deSolve 2ndOrderOde and boundaryCondition1 and boundaryCondition2 independentVar dependentVar a particular solution Returns a particular solution that satisfies 2ndOrderOde and has specified values at two different points deSolve w ì 2w x 9 2 ...

Страница 807: ...he I O 1 Dialog menu item in the Program Editor are 1 Text 2 Request 4 DropDown and 7 Title The variables in a dialog box can be given values that will be displayed as the default or initial value If is pressed the variables are updated from the dialog box and variable ok is set to 1 If N is pressed its variables are not updated and system variable ok is set to zero Programlisting Dlogtest Prgm Di...

Страница 808: ...creen you can press to display the Home screen or a program can use DispHome Disp Hello Hello Disp cos 2 3 ë 666 1 2 3 4 L1 Disp L1 1 2 3 4 Disp 180_min4_hr 3 ø_hr Note Totypeanunderscore _ press2 Totype 4 4 4 4 press2 DispG CATALOG DispG Displays the current contents of the Graph screen Infunctiongraphingmode Programsegment 5ù cos x y1 x ë 10 xmin 10 xmax ë 5 ymin 5 ymax DispG DispHome CATALOG Di...

Страница 809: ...ctor ops menu dotP list1 list2 expression Returns the dot product of two lists dotP a b c d e f aø d bø e cø f dotP 1 2 5 6 17 dotP vector1 vector2 expression Returns the dot product of two vectors Both must be row vectors or both must be column vectors dotP a b c d e f aø d bø e cø f dotP 1 2 3 4 5 6 32 DrawFunc CATALOG DrawFunc expression Draws expression as a function using x as the independent...

Страница 810: ...alter the window settings If the current graphing mode is not polar these three arguments are required Note Regraphing erases all drawn items InfunctiongraphingmodeandZoomStdwindow DrawPol 5ù cos 3ù q 0 3 5 1 DrawSlp CATALOG DrawSlp x1 y1 slope Displays the graph and draws a line using the formula yì y1 slopeø xì x1 Note Regraphing erases all drawn items InfunctiongraphingmodeandZoomStdwindow Draw...

Страница 811: ...er in scientific notation The number is interpreted as mantissa 10exponent Hint If you want to enter a power of 10 without causing a decimal value result use 10 integer 2 3í 4 23000 2 3í 9 4 1í 15 4 1í 15 3ù 10 4 30000 e 2 s key e expression1 expression Returns e raised to the expression1 power Note On the TI 89 Titanium pressing s to display e is different from pressing j E On the Voyage 200 pres...

Страница 812: ...x menu eigVl squareMatrix list Returns a list of the eigenvalues of a real or complex squareMatrix squareMatrix is first balanced with similarity transformations until the row and column norms are as close to the same value as possible The squareMatrix is then reduced to upper Hessenberg form and the eigenvalues are computed from the upper Hessenberg matrix InRectangularcomplexformatmode L1 2 5 3 ...

Страница 813: ...st exact matrix1 tol matrix Uses Exact mode arithmetic regardless of the Exact Approx mode setting to return when possible the rational number equivalent of the argument tol specifies the tolerance for the conversion the default is 0 zero exact 25 1 4 exact 333333 333333 1000000 exact 33333 001 1 3 exact 3 5x y 7ø x 2 y exact 2 33 4 125 1à5 33 100 33à8 Exec CATALOG Exec string expression1 expressi...

Страница 814: ...ression1 var expression expand list1 var list expand matrix1 var matrix expand expression1 returns expression1 expanded with respect to all its variables The expansion is polynomial expansion for polynomials and partial fraction expansion for rational expressions The goal of expand is to transform expression1 into a sum and or difference of simple terms In contrast the goal of factor is to transfo...

Страница 815: ...thms and fractional powers inequality constraints might be necessary to guarantee that some factors are nonnegative expand expression1 var also distributes absolute values sign and exponentials regardless of var Note See also tExpand for trigonometric angle sum and multiple angle expansion ln 2xù y 2xù y ln 2ø xø y 2ø xø y expand ans 1 ln xø y 2ø xø y ln 2 expand ans 1 y 0 ln x 2ø xø y ln y ln 2 s...

Страница 816: ...enominator expression1 is factored as much as possible toward linear rational factors without introducing new non real subexpressions This alternative is appropriate if you want factorization with respect to more than one variable factor a 3ù x 2ì aù x 2ì a 3 a aø a ì1 ø a 1 ø x ì1 ø x 1 factor x 2 1 xñ 1 factor x 2ì 4 x ì 2 ø x 2 factor x 2ì 3 xñ ì 3 factor x 2ì a xñ ì a factor expression1 var re...

Страница 817: ...day and factoring a 100 digit number could take more than a century Note To stop break a computation press If you merely want to determine if a number is prime use isPrime instead It is much faster particularly if rationalNumber is not prime and if the second largest factor has more than five digits factor 152417172689 123457ø1234577 isPrime 152417172689 false Fill MATH Matrix menu Fill expression...

Страница 818: ...eturns a Boolean expression specifying candidate values of var that minimize expression or locate its greatest lower bound Use the operator to restrict the solution interval and or specify the sign of other undefined variables For the APPROX setting of the Exact Approx mode fMin iteratively searches for one approximate local minimum This is often faster particularly if you use the operator to cons...

Страница 819: ...parated with the character Program segment 0 tempsum 1 step For i 1 100 step tempsum i tempsum EndFor Disp tempsum Contents of tempsum after execution 5050 Contents of tempsum when step is changed to 2 2500 format MATH String menu format expression formatString string Returns expression as a character string based on the format template expression must simplify to a number formatString is a string...

Страница 820: ...as the first statement in a multi statement function definition block can be either a single statement or a series of statements separated with the character Note when also can be used to define and graph piecewise defined functions In function graphing mode define a piecewise function Define g x Func If x 0 Then Return 3ù cos x Else Return 3ì x EndIf EndFunc Done Graph g x gcd MATH Number menu gc...

Страница 821: ...tanium If the port is not specified or port 0 is specified the TI 89 Titanium waits for data from either port If port 1 the TI 89 Titanium waits for data from the USB port If port 2 the TI 89 Titanium waits for data from the I O port getConfg CATALOG getConfg ListPairs Returns a list of calculator attributes The attribute name is listed first followed by its value getConfg Product Name Advanced Ma...

Страница 822: ...day of September 2002 when the date format is set to DD MM YY If you enter the optional integer that corresponds to a date format the string returns the current date in the specified format Optional integer values 1 MM DD YY 2 DD MM YY 3 MM DD YY 4 DD MM YY 5 YY MM DD 6 MM DD YY 7 DD MM YY 8 YY MM DD getFold CATALOG getFold nameString Returns the name of the current folder as a string getFold main...

Страница 823: ...Split 1 App Home Split 2 App Graph Number of Graphs 1 Graph 2 FUNCTION Split Screen Ratio 1 1 Exact Approx AUTO Base DEC Note Yourscreenmaydisplaydifferentmode settings getNum MATH Algebra Extract menu getNum expression1 expression Transforms expression1 into one having a reduced common denominator and then returns its numerator getNum x 2 yì 3 x 2 getNum 2 7 2 getNum 1 x 1 y x y getTime CATALOG g...

Страница 824: ...E 1 2 3 temp 1 2 3 getType temp LIST 2 3i temp 2 3i getType temp EXPR DelVar temp Done getType temp NONE Data Type Variable Contents ASM Assembly language program DATA Data type EXPR Expression includes complex arbitrary undefined ˆ ë ˆ TRUE FALSE pi e FUNC Function GDB Graph data base LIST List MAT Matrix NONE Variable does not exist NUM Real number OTHER Miscellaneous data type for future use by...

Страница 825: ...ting with 1 They can be modified or individually deleted using the edit functions available when the table is displayed by pressing Header The currently selected Y functions are ignored If you omit an optional var argument Graph uses the independent variable of the current graphing mode Note Not all optional arguments are valid in all modes because you can never have all four arguments at the same...

Страница 826: ...If CATALOG If Boolean expression If Boolean expression Then statement block EndIf If Boolean expression evaluates to true executes the single statement statement or the block of statements block before continuing execution If Boolean expression evaluates to false continues execution without executing the statement or block of statements block can be either a single statement or a sequence of state...

Страница 827: ...riables See also real imag 1 2i 2 imag z 0 imag x iy y imag list1 list Returns a list of the imaginary parts of the elements imag ë 3 4ë i i 0 ë 1 1 imag matrix1 matrix Returns a matrix of the imaginary parts of the elements imag a b ic id 0 0 c d ImpDif MATH Calculus Menu CATALOG ImpDif equation independentVar dependent Var order expression where the order defaults to 1 Computes the implicit deri...

Страница 828: ... string srcString at which the first occurrence of string subString begins start if included specifies the character position within srcString where the search begins Default 1 the first character of srcString If srcString does not contain subString or start is the length of srcString returns zero inString Hello there the 7 ABCEFG s1 If inString s1 D 0 Disp D not found D not found int CATALOG int ...

Страница 829: ...ot Returns true if var_name is locked or archived Returns false if var_name is not locked or archived isLocked PROG1 False isPrime MATH Test menu isPrime number Boolean constant expression Returns true or false to indicate if number is a whole number 2 that is evenly divisible only by itself and 1 If number exceeds about 306 digits and has no factors 1021 isPrime number displays an error message I...

Страница 830: ...d Goto lbl1 Disp Welcome to lcm MATH Number menu lcm number1 number2 expression lcm list1 list2 list lcm matrix1 matrix2 matrix Returns the least common multiple of the two arguments The lcm of two fractions is the lcm of their numerators divided by the gcd of their denominators The lcm of fractional floating point numbers is their product For two lists or matrices returns the least common multipl...

Страница 831: ...s L Hopital s rule so there are unique limits that it cannot determine If expression1 contains undefined variables other than var you might have to constrain them to obtain a more concise result Limits can be very sensitive to rounding error When possible avoid the APPROX setting of the Exact Approx mode and approximate numbers when computing limits Otherwise limits that should be zero or have inf...

Страница 832: ... draws erases or inverts a horizontal line at window position y If drawMode 1 draws the line default If drawMode 0 turns off the line If drawMode ë 1 turns a line that is on to off or off to on inverts pixels along the line Note Regraphing erases all drawn items See also PxlHorz InaZoomStdwindow LineHorz 2 5 ...

Страница 833: ...0 turns off the line If drawMode ë 1 turns a line that is on to off or off to on inverts pixels along the line Note Regraphing erases all drawn items See also PxlVert In a ZoomStd window LineVert ë 2 5 LinReg MATH Statistics Regressions menu LinReg list1 list2 list3 list4 list5 Calculates the linear regression and updates all the system statistics variables All the lists must have equal dimensions...

Страница 834: ...1 2 3 4 5 2 1 2 3 4 5 0 4 4 4 4ln MATH String menu 4 4 4 4 ln expression expression Causes the input expression to be converted to an expression containing only natural logs ln Log x 4 ln ln ln 10 x ln x key ln expression1 expression ln list1 list Returns the natural logarithm of the argument For a list returns the natural logarithms of the elements ln 2 0 693 IfcomplexformatmodeisREAL ln ë 3 1 2 ...

Страница 835: ...ocal variables Those variables exist only during evaluation of a program or function and are deleted when the program or function finishes execution Note Local variables save memory because they only exist temporarily Also they do not disturb any existing global variable values Local variables must be used for For loops and for temporarily saving values in a multi line function since modifications...

Страница 836: ...is is not the same as calculating the base expression2 logarithm of each element For information about the calculation method refer to cos squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable The result always contains floating point numbers InRadiananglemodeandRectangularcomplex formatmode log 1 5 3 4 2 1 6 ë 2 1 795 753 øi 003 ì 647 øi 194 ì 315 øi 462 270øi ë 115 ì 904 øi 488 777 øi log x b expression log squa...

Страница 837: ...ccuracy but longer execution times and vice versa Note list1 through list4 must be a variable name or c1 c99 columns in the last data variable shown in the Data Matrix Editor list5 does not have to be a variable name and cannot be c1 c99 Infunctiongraphingmode 1 2 3 4 5 6 L1 1 2 3 1 1 3 2 5 3 5 4 5 4 8 L2 1 1 3 2 5 Logistic L1 L2 Done ShowStat regeq x y1 x Done NewPlot 1 1 L1 L2 Done 9 Loop CATALO...

Страница 838: ... or set the mode to Exact Approx APPROXIMATE computations are done using floating point arithmetic If tol is omitted or not used the default tolerance is calculated as 5Eë 14 ù max dim matrix ù rowNorm matrix The LU factorization algorithm uses partial pivoting with row interchanges 6 12 18 5 14 31 3 8 18 m1 6 12 18 5 14 31 3 8 18 LU m1 lower upper perm Done lower 1 0 0 5 6 1 0 1 2 1 2 1 upper 6 1...

Страница 839: ...in matrix1 Note See also fMax and min max 1 ë 3 7 ë 4 0 3 1 0 7 mean MATH Statistics menu mean list freqlist expression Returns the mean of the elements in list Each freqlist element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of the corresponding element in list mean 2 0 1 ë 3 4 26 mean 1 2 3 3 2 1 5 3 mean matrix1 freqmatrix matrix Returns a row vector of the means of all the columns in matrix1...

Страница 840: ...mid sourceString start count string Returns count characters from character string sourceString beginning with character number start If count is omitted or is greater than the dimension of sourceString returns all characters from sourceString beginning with character number start count must be 0 If count 0 returns an empty string mid Hello there 2 ello there mid Hello there 7 3 the mid Hello ther...

Страница 841: ...d argument is non zero the result is periodic in that argument The result is either zero or has the same sign as the second argument If the arguments are two lists or two matrices returns a list or matrix containing the modulo of each pair of corresponding elements Note See also remain mod 7 0 7 mod 7 3 1 mod ë 7 3 2 mod 7 ë 3 ë 2 mod ë 7 ë 3 ë 1 mod 12 ë 14 16 9 7 ë 5 3 0 ë 4 MoveVar CATALOG Move...

Страница 842: ...must be the same size matrix nCr 6 5 4 3 2 2 2 2 15 10 6 3 nDeriv MATH Calculus menu nDeriv expression1 var h expression nDeriv expression1 var list list nDeriv list var h list nDeriv matrix var h matrix Returns the numerical derivative as an expression Uses the central difference quotient formula h is the step value If h is omitted it defaults to 0 001 When using list or matrix the operation gets...

Страница 843: ... is zero newList 4 0 0 0 0 newMat CATALOG also Math Matrix menu newMat numRows numColumns matrix Returns a matrix of zeros with the dimension numRows by numColumns newMat 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 NewPic CATALOG NewPic matrix picVar maxRow maxCol Creates a pic variable picVar based on matrix matrix must be an n 2 matrix in which each row represents a pixel Pixel coordinates start at 0 0 If picVar already ex...

Страница 844: ...from a cleared state without resetting the memory Clears all single character variable names Clear a z in the current folder unless the variables are locked or archived Turns off all functions and stat plots FnOff and PlotsOff in the current graphing mode Perfoms ClrDraw ClrErr ClrGraph ClrHome ClrIO and ClrTable NewProb Done nInt MATH Calculus menu nInt expression1 var lower upper expression If t...

Страница 845: ...rm a symmetric modulo operation is used to bring the value into the appropriate range InHexbasemode not 0h7AC36 0hFFF853C9 InBinbasemode 0b1001014dec 37 not 0b100101 0b11111111111111111111111111011010 ans 1 4dec ë 38 Note Abinaryentrycanhaveupto32digits not countingthe0bprefix Ahexadecimalentrycanhave upto8digits Note Totypethe 4 4 4 4conversionoperator press 2 Youcanalsoselectbaseconversionsfromt...

Страница 846: ...he residual is zero or two relatively close points where the residual has opposite signs and the magnitude of the residual is not excessive If it cannot achieve this using a modest number of sample points it returns the string no solution found If you use nSolve in a program you can use getType to check for a numeric result before using it in an algebraic expression Note See also cSolve cZeros sol...

Страница 847: ...r a signed 32 bit binary form a symmetric modulo operation is used to bring the value into the appropriate range Note See xor InHexbasemode 0h7AC36 or 0h3D5F 0h7BD7F InBinbasemode 0b100101 or 0b100 0b100101 Note Abinaryentrycanhaveupto32digits not countingthe0bprefix Ahexadecimalentrycanhave upto8digits ord MATH String menu ord string integer ord list1 list Returns the numeric code of the first ch...

Страница 848: ... 10 1 3 p 3 ë p 4 0 ë 3ø 3 2 ë 5ø 2 0 part CATALOG part expression1 nonNegativeInteger This advanced programming function lets you identify and extract all of the sub expressions in the simplified result of expression1 For example if expression1 simplifies to cos pù x 3 The cos function has one argument pù x 3 The sum of pù x 3 has two operands pù x and 3 The number 3 has no arguments or operands ...

Страница 849: ... cos part cos pù x 3 1 temp 3 pøx temp pøx 3 part temp 0 part temp 2 part temp 2 3 part temp 1 temp pøx part temp 0 ù part temp 2 part temp 1 p part temp 2 x Expressions such as x y z and xì yì z are represented internally as x y z and xì y ì z This affects the values returned for the first and second argument There are technical reasons why part x y z 1 returns y x instead of x y part x y z 2 par...

Страница 850: ...he next level If errornum is zero PassErr does not do anything The Else clause in the program should use ClrErr or PassErr If the error is to be processed or ignored use ClrErr If what to do with the error is not known use PassErr to send it to the next error handler See also ClrErr SeeClrErr programlistingexample Pause CATALOG Pause expression Suspends program execution If you include expression ...

Страница 851: ...function You can use it only at the end of an entry line and it does not update ans Note See also 4Rect 1 3 4Polar x y 4Polar complexValue 4Polar Displays complexVector in polar form Degree angle mode returns r q Radian angle mode returns reiq complexValue can have any complex form However an reiq entry causes an error in Degree angle mode Note You must use the parentheses for an r q polar entry I...

Страница 852: ...st1 represents xlist list2 represents ylist list3 represents frequency list4 represents category codes list5 represents category include list Note list1 through list4 must be a variable name or c1 c99 columns in the last data variable shown in the Data Matrix Editor list5 does not have to be a variable name and cannot be c1 c99 In function graphing mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 L1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 3 4 6 L2 1 2 ...

Страница 853: ...ropFrac ë 4 3 ë 1ì 1 3 propFrac rational_expression var returns the sum of proper ratios and a polynomial with respect to var The degree of var in the denominator exceeds the degree of var in the numerator in each proper ratio Similar powers of var are collected The terms and their factors are sorted with var as the main variable If var is omitted a proper fraction expansion is done with respect t...

Страница 854: ...3 5 PxlChg CATALOG PxlChg row col PxlChg rowList colList Displays the Graph screen and reverses the pixel at pixel coordinates row col Note Regraphing erases all drawn items PxlChg 2 4 PxlCrcl CATALOG PxlCrcl row col r drawMode Displays the Graph screen and draws a circle centered at pixel coordinates row col with a radius of r pixels If drawMode 1 draws the circle default If drawMode 0 turns off ...

Страница 855: ... all drawn items PxlHorz 25 1 PxlOff 25 50 25 50 PxlOn CATALOG PxlOn row col PxlOn rowList colList Displays the Graph screen and turns on the pixel at pixel coordinates row col Note Regraphing erases all drawn items PxlOn 25 50 pxlTest CATALOG pxlTest row col Boolean expression pxlTest rowList colList Boolean expression Returns true if the pixel at pixel coordinates row col is on Returns false if ...

Страница 856: ...trix has floating point entries and does not contain any symbolic variables that have not been assigned a value Otherwise tol is ignored If you use or set the mode to Exact Approx APPROXIMATE computations are done using floating point arithmetic If tol is omitted or not used the default tolerance is calculated as 5Eë 14 ù max dim matrix ù rowNorm matrix Thefloating pointnumber 9 inm1causesresultst...

Страница 857: ...atrix Editor list5 does not have to be a variable name and cannot be c1 c99 Regeq x y1 x Done NewPlot 1 1 L1 L2 Done QuartReg MATH Statistics Regressions menu QuartReg list1 list2 list3 list4 list5 Calculates the quartic polynomial regression and updates the system statistics variables All the lists must have equal dimensions except for list5 list1 represents xlist list2 represents ylist list3 rep...

Страница 858: ... R4 4 4 4Pr xList yList list R4 4 4 4Pr xMatrix yMatrix matrix Returns the equivalent r coordinate of the x y pair arguments InRadiananglemode R4Pr 3 2 R4Pr x y R4Pr 3 4 2 0 pà4 1 5 4 4 4 4Rad CATALOG MATH Angle menu 4 4 4 4 Rad expression Converts an expression to radian angle measure InDegreeanglemode 1 5 4Rad 02618R InGradiananglemode 1 5 4Rad 023562R rand MATH Probability menu rand n expressio...

Страница 859: ...der must be 0 99 RandSeed 1147 Done randPoly x 5 ë 2ø x5 5 5 5 3ø x4 4 4 4ì 6ø x3 3 3 3 4ø xì 6 RandSeed MATH Probability menu RandSeed number If number 0 sets the seeds to the factory defaults for the random number generator If number ƒ 0 it is used to generate two seeds which are stored in system variables seed1 and seed2 RandSeed 1147 Done rand 158 RclGDB CATALOG RclGDB GDBvar Restores all the ...

Страница 860: ...Note You must use parentheses for an r q polar entry InRadiananglemode 4e p 3 4Rect 4øe p 3 4 p 3 4Rect 2 2ø 3øi InGradiananglemode 1 100 4Rect i InDegreeanglemode 4 60 4Rect 2 2ø 3øi Note Totype 4 4 4 4Rectfromthekeyboard press 2 forthe 4 4 4 4operator Totype press2 ref MATH Matrix menu ref matrix1 tol matrix Returns the row echelon form of matrix1 Optionally any matrix element is treated as zero...

Страница 861: ...or this input In either case if var contains a string it is displayed and highlighted in the input box as a default choice promptString must be 20 characters This instruction can be stand alone or part of a dialog construct Request Enter text t 1 The argument turned on alpha lock in the above example The optional alphaOn Off argument can be any expression If it evaluates to zero alpha lock is set ...

Страница 862: ...he magnitude of integer1 is too large for this form a symmetric modulo operation brings it within the range InBinbasemode rotate 0b1111010110000110101 0b10000000000000111101011000011010 rotate 256 1 0b1000000000 If of Rotations is positive the rotation is to the left If of Rotations is negative the rotation is to the right The default is ë 1 rotate right one bit For example in a right rotation InH...

Страница 863: ...und 1 234567 3 1 235 round list1 digits list Returns a list of the elements rounded to the specified number of digits round p 2 ln 2 4 3 1416 1 4142 6931 round matrix1 digits matrix Returns a matrix of the elements rounded to the specified number of digits round ln 5 ln 3 p e 1 1 1 6 1 1 3 1 2 7 rowAdd MATH Matrix Row ops menu rowAdd matrix1 rIndex1 rIndex2 matrix Returns a copy of matrix1 with ro...

Страница 864: ...2 0 ë 6 1 ë 1 9 ë 9 ë 5 2 4 ë 4 1 0 0 66 71 0 1 0 147 71 0 0 1 ë 62 71 Optionally any matrix element is treated as zero if its absolute value is less than tol This tolerance is used only if the matrix has floating point entries and does not contain any symbolic variables that have not been assigned a value Otherwise tol is ignored If you use or set the mode to Exact Approx APPROXIMATE computations...

Страница 865: ...L1 MATH Hyperbolic menu sechL L L L1 expression1 expression sechL L L L1 list1 list Returns the inverse hyperbolic secant of expression1 or returns a list containing the inverse hyperbolic secants of each element of list1 InRadianangleandRectangularcomplexmode sechL1 1 0 sechL1 1 L2 2 1 0 2 p 3 i 1 074 i Send CATALOG Send list CBL 2é CBLé Calculator Based Laboratoryé or CBRé Calculator Based Range...

Страница 866: ...x SendChat x seq MATH List menu seq expression var low high step list Increments var from low through high by an increment of step evaluates expression and returns the results as a list The original contents of var are still there after seq is completed var cannot be a system variable The default value for step 1 seq n 2 n 1 6 1 4 9 16 25 36 seq 1 n n 1 10 2 1 1 3 1 5 1 7 1 9 sum seq 1àn 2 n 1 10 ...

Страница 867: ...d below for the specific mode you are setting setGraph Graph Order Seq SEQ setGraph Coordinates Off RECT Note Capitalizationandblankspacesareoptional whenenteringmodenames Mode Name Settings Coordinates Rect Polar Off Graph Order Seq Simul 1 Grid Off On 2 Axes Off On not 3D graph mode Off Axes Box 3D graph mode Leading Cursor Off On 2 Labels Off On Style Wire Frame Hidden Surface Contour Levels Wi...

Страница 868: ...tUnits instead of setMode or getMode setMode Angle Degree RADIAN sin 45 2 2 setMode Angle Radian DEGREE sin pà4 2 2 setMode Angle Gradian RADIAN sin 50 2 2 setMode Display Digits Fix 2 FLOAT p 3 14 setMode Display Digits Float FIX 2 p 3 141 setMode Split Screen Left Right Split 1 App Graph Split 2 App Table Split 2 App Graph Split 1 App Home Split Screen FULL Note Capitalizationandblankspacesareop...

Страница 869: ...g is a character string that specifies the new setting for the parameter It must be one of the settings listed below for the specific parameter you are setting setTable Graph ì Table ON OFF setTable Independent AUTO ASK Note Capitalization and blank spaces are optional when entering parameters Parameter Name Settings Graph Table Off On Independent Auto Ask setTime CATALOG setTime hour minute secon...

Страница 870: ... and returns a list of the previous defaults To specify the built in SI metric or ENG US system list1 uses the form SI or ENG US To specify a custom set of default units list1 uses the form CUSTOM cat1 unit1 cat2 unit2 where each cat and unit pair specifies a category and its default unit You can specify built in units only not user defined units Any category not specified will use its previous cu...

Страница 871: ...tern specifies one of four shading patterns 1 vertical default 2 horizontal 3 negative slope 45 4 positive slope 45 patRes specifies the resolution of the shading patterns 1 solid shading 2 1 pixel spacing default 3 2 pixels spacing 10 9 pixels spacing Note Interactive shading is available on the Graph screen through the Shade instruction Automatic shading of a specific function is available throu...

Страница 872: ...ero notthe letterO 0b00000000000001111010110000110101 produces 0b00000000000000111101011000011010 The result is displayed according to the Base mode Leading zeros are not shown shift list1 ofShifts list Returns a copy of list1 shifted right or left by ofShifts elements Does not alter list1 If ofShifts is positive the shift is to the left If ofShifts is negative the shift is to the right The defaul...

Страница 873: ...gn 1 abs x 1 If complex format mode is REAL sign ë 3 0 3 ë 1 1 1 simult MATH Matrix menu simult coeffMatrix constVector tol matrix Returns a column vector that contains the solutions to a system of linear equations coeffMatrix must be a square matrix that contains the coefficients of the equations constVector must have the same number of rows same dimension as coeffMatrix and contain the constants...

Страница 874: ...le mode You can use ó G o r ô to override the angle mode setting temporarily In Degree angle mode sin p 4 ô 2 2 sin 45 2 2 sin 0 60 90 0 3 2 1 InGradiananglemode sin 50 2 2 In Radian angle mode sin p 4 2 2 sin 45 2 2 sin squareMatrix1 squareMatrix Returns the matrix sine of squareMatrix1 This is not the same as calculating the sine of each element For information about the calculation method refer...

Страница 875: ...ting the hyperbolic sine of each element For information about the calculation method refer to cos squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable The result always contains floating point numbers InRadiananglemode sinh 1 5 3 4 2 1 6 ë 2 1 360 954 305 708 239 604 352 912 233 495 193 564 298 632 154 599 140 251 sinhê MATH Hyperbolic menu sinhê expression1 expression sinhê list1 list sinhê expression1 returns ...

Страница 876: ... Done NewPlot 1 1 L1 L2 Done 9 solve MATH Algebra menu solve equation var Boolean expression solve inequality var Boolean expression Returns candidate real solutions of an equation or an inequality for var The goal is to return candidates for all solutions However there might be equations or inequalities for which the number of solutions is infinite solve aù x 2 bù x c 0 x x bñ 4ø aø c b 2ø a or x...

Страница 877: ... real or principal branch Note See also cSolve cZeros nSolve and zeros solve x 1 3 ë 1 x x ë 1 solve x ë 2 x false solve ë x ë 2 x x 4 solve equation1 and equation2 and varOrGuess1 varOrGuess2 Boolean expression Returns candidate real solutions to the simultaneous algebraic equations where each varOrGuess specifies a variable that you want to solve for Optionally you can specify an initial guess f...

Страница 878: ...ng an approximate iterative method To do so the number of solution variables must equal the number of equations and all other variables in the equations must simplify to numbers solve e z ù y 1 and ë y sin z y z y 041 and z 3 183 Each solution variable starts at its guessed value if there is one otherwise it starts at 0 0 Use guesses to seek additional solutions one by one For convergence a guess ...

Страница 879: ...apsed You can run multiple timers simultaneously Note See also checkTmr and timeCnv startTmr 148083315 checkTmr 148083315 34 startTmr Timer1 startTmr Timer2 checkTmr Timer1 Timer1Value checkTmr Timer2 Timer2Value stdDev MATH Statistics menu stdDev list freqlist expression Returns the standard deviation of the elements in list Each freqlist element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of th...

Страница 880: ...s of the columns in matrix1 Each freqmatrix element counts the number of consecutive occurrences of the corresponding element in matrix1 Note matrix1 must have at least two rows stdDevPop 1 2 5 3 0 1 5 7 3 stdDevPop L1 2 5 3 2 5 7 3 6 L4 4 2 3 3 1 7 StoGDB CATALOG StoGDB GDBvar Creates a Graph database GDB variable that contains the current Graphing mode Y functions Window variables Graph format s...

Страница 881: ... string string 1 2345 1 2345 string 1 2 3 string cos x 3 cos x 3 Style CATALOG Style equanum stylePropertyString Sets the system graphing function equanum in the current graph mode to use the graphing property stylePropertyString equanum must be an integer from 1 99 and the function must already exist stylePropertyString must be one of Line Dot Square Thick Animate Path Above or Below Note that in...

Страница 882: ... Returns a row vector containing the sums of the elements in the columns in matrix1 Start and end are optional They specify a range of rows sum 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 7 9 sum 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 15 18 sum 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 11 13 15 switch CATALOG switch integer1 integer Returns the number of the active window Also can set the active window Note Window 1 is left or top Window 2 is right or bottom If in...

Страница 883: ... starting with 1 The expressions can be modified or individually deleted using the edit functions available when the table is displayed by pressing Header The currently selected functions in the Y Editor are temporarily ignored To clear the functions created by Table or Graph execute the ClrGraph command or display the Y Editor If the var parameter is omitted the current graph mode independent var...

Страница 884: ...eMatrix1 must be diagonalizable The result always contains floating point numbers InRadiananglemode tan 1 5 3 4 2 1 6 ë 2 1 ë 28 291 26 088 11 114 12 117 ë 7 835 ë 5 481 36 818 ë 32 806 ë 10 459 tanê 2 S key tanê expression1 expression tanê list1 list tanê expression1 returns the angle whose tangent is expression1 as an expression tanê list1 returns a list of the inverse tangents of each element o...

Страница 885: ...ents of each element of list1 In rectangular complex format mode tanhê 0 0 tanhê 1 2 1 3 ˆ 518 ì 1 570 ø i ln 2 2 ì p 2ø i tanhê squareMatrix1 squareMatrix Returns the matrix inverse hyperbolic tangent of squareMatrix1 This is not the same as calculating the inverse hyperbolic tangent of each element For information about the calculation method refer to cos squareMatrix1 must be diagonalizable The...

Страница 886: ...are many possible equivalent results Consequently a result might differ from a result shown in other publications Sometimes tExpand will accomplish your goals when the default trigonometric simplification does not tExpand tends to reverse transformations done by tCollect Sometimes applying tCollect to a result from tExpand or vice versa in two separate steps simplifies an expression Note Degree mo...

Страница 887: ...Rankine For example 100_ C converts to 212_ F To convert a temperature range use tmpCnv instead tmpCnv 100_ c _ f 212 ø_ F tmpCnv 32_ f _ c 0 ø_ C tmpCnv 0_ c _ k 273 15ø_ K tmpCnv 0_ f _ r 459 67ø_ R Note Toselecttemperatureunitsfromamenu press À tmpCnv CATALOG tmpCnv expression1_ tempUnit1 _ tempUnit2 expression _ tempUnit2 Converts a temperature range the difference between two temperature valu...

Страница 888: ... the program Trace CATALOG Trace Draws a Smart Graph and places the trace cursor on the first defined Y function at the previously defined cursor position or at the reset position if regraphing was necessary Allows operation of the cursor and most keys when editing coordinate values Several keys such as the function keys O and 3 are not activated during trace Note Press to resume operation Try CAT...

Страница 889: ...tat Unarchiv CATALOG Unarchiv var1 var2 var3 Moves the specified variables from the user data archive memory to RAM You can access an archived variable the same as you would a variable in RAM However you cannot delete rename or store to an archived variable because it is locked automatically To archive variables use Archive 10 arctest 10 Archive arctest Done 5ù arctest 50 15 arctest N Unarchiv arc...

Страница 890: ...iance 1 2 5 ë 3 0 1 5 7 3 4 75 1 03 4 variance L1 1 2 2 3 4 5 1 L2 3 4 3 6 3 2 4 5 1 3 91731 2 08411 when CATALOG when condition trueResult falseResult unknownResult expression Returns trueResult falseResult or unknownResult depending on whether condition is true false or unknown Returns the input if there are too few arguments to specify the appropriate result Omit both falseResult and unknownRes...

Страница 891: ...esolved to true or false Note See or true xor true false 5 3 xor 3 5 true integer1 xor integer2 integer Compares two real integers bit by bit using an xor operation Internally both integers are converted to signed 32 bit binary numbers When corresponding bits are compared the result is 1 if either bit but not both is 1 the result is 0 if both bits are 0 or both bits are 1 The returned value repres...

Страница 892: ...en Uses xor logic for each pixel Only those pixel positions that are exclusive to either the screen or the picture are turned on This instruction turns off pixels that are turned on in both images picVar must contain a pic data type row and column if included specify the pixel coordinates for the upper left corner of the picture Defaults are 0 0 ...

Страница 893: ...nknown whose value you seek Optionally you can specify an initial guess for a variable Each varOrGuess must have the form variable or variable real or non real number For example x is valid and so is x 3 If all of the expressions are polynomials and if you do NOT specify any initial guesses zeros uses the lexical Gröbner Buchberger elimination method to attempt to determine all real zeros For exam...

Страница 894: ...in any variable but all expressions are linear in the unknowns zeros uses Gaussian elimination to attempt to determine all real zeros zeros x e z ù yì 1 xì yì sin z x y ezøsin z 1 ez 1 ë sin z ì 1 ez 1 If a system is neither polynomial in all of its variables nor linear in its unknowns zeros determines at most one zero using an approximate iterative method To do so the number of unknowns must equa...

Страница 895: ...led and displays the Graph screen Note Does not adjust ymin and ymax for histograms In function graphing mode 1 2 3 4 L1 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 L2 2 3 4 5 newPlot 1 1 L1 L2 Done ZoomStd ZoomData ZoomDec CATALOG ZoomDec Adjusts the viewing window so that x and y 0 1 and displays the Graph screen with the origin centered on the screen In function graphing mode 1 25xù cos x y1 x Done ZoomStd ZoomDec ...

Страница 896: ...he Graph screen lets you set a center point for a zoom in and updates the viewing window The magnitude of the zoom is dependent on the Zoom factors xFact and yFact In 3D Graph mode the magnitude is dependent on xFact yFact and zFact In function graphing mode 1 25xù cos x y1 x Done ZoomStd ZoomIn ZoomInt CATALOG ZoomInt Displays the Graph screen lets you set a center point for the zoom and adjusts ...

Страница 897: ...s the Graph screen and updates the viewing window with the settings in use before the last zoom ZoomRcl CATALOG ZoomRcl Displays the Graph screen and updates the viewing window using the settings stored with the ZoomSto instruction ZoomSqr CATALOG ZoomSqr Displays the Graph screen adjusts the x or y window settings so that each pixel represents an equal width and height in the coordinate system an...

Страница 898: ...ncontour 5 Differential equations graphing t 0 10 1 0 x ë 1 10 1 y ë 10 10 1 ncurves 0 Estep 1 diftol 001 fldres 14 dtime 0 In function graphing mode 1 25xù cos x y1 x Done ZoomStd ZoomSto CATALOG ZoomSto Stores the current Window settings in the Zoom memory You can use ZoomRcl to restore the settings ZoomTrig CATALOG ZoomTrig Displays the Graph screen sets x to p 24 and xscl to p 2 centers the or...

Страница 899: ...on1 minus expression2 6ì 2 4 pì pà6 5ø p 6 list1 list2 list matrix1 matrix2 matrix Subtracts each element in list2 or matrix2 from the corresponding element in list1 or matrix1 and returns the results Dimensions of the arguments must be equal 22 p pà2 ì 10 5 pà2 12 pì 5 0 3 4 ì 1 2 2 2 expression list1 list list1 expression list Subtracts each list1 element from expression or subtracts expression ...

Страница 900: ...e products of expression and each element in matrix1 Note Use ù dot multiply to multiply an expression by each element 1 2 3 4 ù 01 01 02 03 04 lù identity 3 l 0 0 0 l 0 0 0 l à à à à divide e key expression1 à expression2 expression Returns the quotient of expression1 divided by expression2 2 3 45 57971 x 3 x x2 list1 à list2 list Returns a list containing the quotients of list1 divided by list2 ...

Страница 901: ...eMatrix1 integer matrix Returns squareMatrix1 raised to the integer power squareMatrix1 must be a square matrix If integer ë 1 computes the inverse matrix If integer ë 1 computes the inverse matrix to an appropriate positive power 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 ë 1 1 2 3 4 ë 2 dot add keys matrix1 matrix2 matrix expression matrix1 matrix matrix1 matrix2 returns a matrix that is the sum of each pair of correspo...

Страница 902: ... element in matrix1 a 2 b 3 c 4 5 d x c 4 5 d dot power Z keys matrix1 matrix2 matrix expression matrix1 matrix matrix1 matrix2 returns a matrix where each element in matrix2 is the exponent for the corresponding element in matrix1 expression matrix1 returns a matrix where each element in matrix1 is the exponent for expression a 2 b 3 c 4 5 d x c 4 5 d ë negate key and MATH Base menu ëexpression1 ...

Страница 903: ...thing else returns a simplified form of the equation For lists and matrices returns comparisons element by element Example function listing using math test symbols ƒ g x Func If x ë 5 Then Return 5 ElseIf x ë 5 and x 0 Then Return ë x ElseIf x 0 and xƒ10 Then Return x ElseIf x 10 Then Return 3 EndIf EndFunc Graph g x Á key expression1 expression2 Boolean expression list1 list2 Boolean list matrix1...

Страница 904: ... returns a simplified form of the equation For lists and matrices returns comparisons element by element See equal example 2Ã key expression1 expression2 Boolean expression list1 list2 Boolean list matrix1 matrix2 Boolean matrix Returns true if expression1 is determined to be greater than expression2 Returns false if expression1 is determined to be less than or equal to expression2 Anything else r...

Страница 905: ...s a constant of integration if only upper is omitted x 2 x xò 3 aù x 2 x c aø xò 3 c Equally valid anti derivatives might differ by a numeric constant Such a constant might be disguised particularly when an anti derivative contains logarithms or inverse trigonometric functions Moreover piecewise constant expressions are sometimes added to make an anti derivative valid over a larger interval than t...

Страница 906: ... Π expression1 var low high expression Evaluates expression1 for each value of var from low to high and returns the product of the results Π 1 n n 1 5 1 120 Π k 2 k 1 n n ñ Π 1 n n 2 n 1 5 1 120 120 32 Π Π Π Π expression1 var low lowì 1 1 Π k k 4 3 1 Π Π Π Π expression1 var low high 1 Π expression1 var high 1 lowì 1 if high lowì 1 Π 1 k k 4 1 6 Π 1 k k 4 1 ù Π 1 k k 2 4 1 4 G sum MATH Calculus men...

Страница 907: ... Angle menu expression1ô expression list1ô list matrix1ô matrix In Degree angle mode multiplies expression1 by 180 p In Radian angle mode returns expression1 unchanged In Gradian mode multiplies expression1 by 200 p This function gives you a way to use a radian angle while in Degree and Gradian mode Hint Use ô if you want to force radians in a function or program definition regardless of the mode ...

Страница 908: ...non negative number Returns dd mm 60 ss ss 3600 This base 60 entry format lets you Enter an angle in degrees minutes seconds without regard to the current angle mode Enter time as hours minutes seconds In Degree angle mode 25 13 17 5 25 221 25 30 51 2 prime 2 È key variable variable Enters a prime symbol in a differential equation A single prime symbol denotes a 1st order differential equation two...

Страница 909: ...rom a menu or you can type the unit names directly To get the _ underscore when typing units directly press 2 Note The 4 conversion operator does not handle temperature units Use tmpCnv and tmpCnv instead 3_m 4 _ft 9 842 ø_ft 10 CATALOG 10 expression1 expression 10 list1 list Returns 10 raised to the power of the argument For a list returns 10 raised to the power of the elements in list1 10 1 5 31...

Страница 910: ...2x 7 f x Done f x x 3 3 7 sin x 2 2sin x ì 6 sin x d dñ 2dì 6 Interval constraints take the form of one or more inequalities joined by logical and operators Interval constraints also permit simplification that otherwise might be invalid or not computable solve x 2ì 1 0 x x 0 and x 2 x 1 x ù 1 x x 0 1 x ù 1 x 1 x ø x Exclusions use the not equals or ƒ relational operator to exclude a specific value...

Страница 911: ...decimal number respectively To enter a binary or hex number you must enter the 0b or 0h prefix regardless of the Base mode Without a prefix a number is treated as decimal base 10 Results are displayed according to the Base mode In Dec base mode 0b10 0hF 10 27 In Bin base mode 0b10 0hF 10 0b11011 In Hex base mode 0b10 0hF 10 0h1B ...

Страница 912: ...Appendix B Technical Reference This section contains a comprehensive list of TI 89 Titanium Voyage 200 error messages and character codes It also includes information about how certain TI 89 Titanium Voyage 200 operations are calculated ...

Страница 913: ...r 50 Argument mismatch Two or more arguments must be of the same type For example PtOn expression1 expression2 and PtOn list1 list2 are both valid but PtOn expression list is a mismatch 60 Argument must be a Boolean expression or integer 70 Argument must be a decimal number 80 Argument must be a label name 90 Argument must be a list 100 Argument must be a matrix 110 Argument must be a Pic 120 Argu...

Страница 914: ...ype An argument is of the wrong data type 220 Dependent limit A limit of integration is dependent on the integration variable For example ä x 2 x 1 x is not allowed 225 Diff Eq setup 230 Dimension A list or matrix index is not valid For example if the list 1 2 3 4 is stored in L1 then L1 5 is a dimension error because L1 only contains four elements 240 Dimension mismatch Two or more arguments must...

Страница 915: ...name 380 Invalid ans 390 Invalid assignment 400 Invalid assignment value 405 Invalid axes 410 Invalid command 420 Invalid folder name 430 Invalid for the current mode settings 440 Invalid implied multiply For example x x 1 is invalid whereas x x 1 is the correct syntax This is to avoid confusion between implied multiplication and function calls 450 Invalid in a function or current expression Only ...

Страница 916: ...athname For example var is invalid 575 Invalid polar complex 580 Invalid program reference Programs cannot be referenced within functions or expressions such as 1 p x where p is a program 585 Invalid relocation data in ASM program The necessary relocation data in the ASM Assembly program is missing or corrupted 590 Invalid syntax block A Dialog EndDlog block is empty or has more than one title A C...

Страница 917: ...layed 790 Non algebraic variable in expression If a is the name of a PIC GDB MAC FIG etc a 1 is invalid Use a different variable name in the expression or delete the variable 800 Non real result For example if the unit is in the REAL setting of the Complex Format mode ln 2 is invalid 810 Not enough memory to save current variable Please delete unneeded variables on the Var Link screen and re open ...

Страница 918: ...d variable 965 Unlicensed OS or Flash application 970 Variable in use so references or changes are not allowed 980 Variable is locked protected or archived 990 Variable name is limited to 8 characters 1000 Window variables domain 1010 Zoom Warning ö 0 or undef 0 replaced by 1 Warning 0 0 replaced by 1 Warning 1 or 1 undef replaced by 1 Warning cSolve may specify more zeros Warning May produce fals...

Страница 919: ... number of digits These decimal settings affect only how results are displayed you can enter a number in any format Internally the TI 89 Titanium Voyage 200 retains decimal numbers with 14 significant digits For display purposes such numbers are rounded to a maximum of 12 significant digits Note Domain of result may be larger Note Domain of result may be smaller 1 FUNCTION y x functions 2 PARAMETR...

Страница 920: ...r format F FLOAT 1 G FLOAT 2 Q FLOAT 12 If the integer part has more than the selected number of digits the result is rounded and displayed in scientific notation For example in FLOAT 4 12345 is shown as 1 235E4 1 RADIAN 2 DEGREE 3 GRADIAN 1 NORMAL Expresses numbers in standard format For example 12345 67 2 SCIENTIFIC Expresses numbers in two parts The significant digits display with one digit to ...

Страница 921: ...it 1 App and Split 2 App Specifies which application is displayed on the screen For a full screen only Split 1 App is active For a split screen Split 1 App is the top or left part of the screen and Split 2 App is the bottom or right part 1 RECTANGULAR Coordinates are in terms of x y and z For example 3 5 2 represents x 3 y 5 and z 2 2 CYLINDRICAL Coordinates are in terms of r q and z For example 3...

Страница 922: ...it screen Exact Approx Specifies how fractional and symbolic expressions are calculated and displayed By retaining rational and symbolic forms in the EXACT setting the TI 89 Titanium Voyage 200 increases precision by eliminating most numeric rounding errors Note For a complete description of these settings refer to Formats of Displayed Results in the Operating the Calculator module 1 Only one part...

Страница 923: ... perform calculations by entering numbers in decimal binary or hexadecimal form 1 DEC Decimal numbers use 0 9 in the base 10 format 2 HEX Hexadecimal numbers use 0 9 and A F in the base 16 format 3 BIN Binary numbers use 0 and 1 in the base 2 format ...

Страница 924: ...r the metric system of measurements 2 ENG US Select ENG US for the non metric system of measurements 3 CUSTOM Allows you to select custom defaults 1 English Default language included with the TI 89 Titanium Voyage 200 operating system OS 2 language Flash applications Alternate languages are available only if the respective language Flash applications have been installed ON Displays the navigable A...

Страница 925: ...91 92 93 94 95 _ 96 97 a 98 b 99 c 100 d 101 e 102 f 103 g 104 h 105 i 106 j 107 k 108 l 109 m 110 n 111 o 112 p 113 q 114 r 115 s 116 t 117 u 118 v 119 w 120 x 121 y 122 z 123 124 125 126 127 2 128 α 129 β 130 Γ 131 γ 132 Δ 133 δ 134 ε 135 ζ 136 θ 137 λ 138 ξ 139 Π 140 π 141 ρ 142 Σ 143 σ 144 τ 145 φ 146 ψ 147 Ω 148 ω 149 E 150 e 151 i 152 r 153 154 ü 155 ý 156 157 Ä 158 159 ù 160 161 162 163 164...

Страница 926: ... à F5 272 F5 272 F5 272 Table 8464 F5 272 Copy 24576 Cut 12288 äj a lock N ESC 264 ESC 264 QUIT 4360 PASTE 8456 ESC 264 O APPS 265 APPS 265 Switch 4361 8457 APPS 265 HOME 277 HOME 277 CUST 4373 HOME 277 Home 277 3 MODE 266 MODE 266 ú 18 _ 95 MODE 266 CATLG 278 CATLG 278 i 151 190 CATLG 278 0 BS 257 BS 257 INS 4353 DEL 8447 BS 257 M CLEAR 263 CLEAR 263 CLEAR 263 8455 Ù x 120 X 88 LN 4184 ex 8280 x ...

Страница 927: ... 158 w 119 μ 0 48 V 86 60 156 v 118 1 49 Q 81 34 8241 q 113 2 50 R 50 92 8242 r 114 ª 3 51 S3 83 CUST 4147 8243 s 115 y 4 52 L 76 58 8244 l 108 z 5 53 M 77 MATH 4149 8245 m 109 6 54 N 78 MEM 4150 8246 n 110 m 7 55 G 71 4151 8247 g 103 n 8 56 H 72 d 4152 8248 h 104 o 9 57 I 73 59 8249 i 105 Table 1 Key Codes for Primary Keys Key Modifier None Û 2 j Assoc Value Assoc Value Assoc Value Assoc Value As...

Страница 928: ...sing 2 ƒ will return a value of 268 Key Normal 2 j C 338 16722 4434 8530 33106 B 340 16724 4436 8532 33108 D 344 16728 4440 8536 33112 A 337 16721 4433 8529 33105 C and A 339 16723 4435 8531 33107 C and B 342 16726 4438 8534 33110 D and A 345 16729 4441 8537 33113 D and B 348 16732 4444 8540 33116 Keys Second modifier j Assoc Value Assoc Value Á A α 128 c B β 129 b D δ 133 Δ 132 e E ε 134 Í F φ 14...

Страница 929: ...E 266 MODE 266 MODE 266 8458 M CLEAR 263 CLEAR 263 CLEAR 263 8455 x LN 262 LN 262 e x 4358 8454 N ESC 264 ESC 264 QUIT 4360 8456 O APPS 265 APPS 265 SWITCH 4361 8457 CR 13 CR 13 ENTRY 4109 APPROX 8205 W SIN 259 SIN 259 SIN 1 4355 8451 X COS 260 COS 260 COS 1 4356 8452 Y TAN 261 TAN 261 TAN 1 4357 8453 Z 94 94 p 140 8286 c 40 40 123 8232 d 41 41 125 8233 b 44 44 91 8236 e 47 47 93 8239 p 42 42 4138...

Страница 930: ... A a 97 A 65 Table 3 8257 B b 98 B 66 39 8258 C c 99 C 67 Table 4 COPY 8259 D d 100 D 68 176 8260 E e 101 E 69 Table 5 WINDOW 8261 F f 102 F 70 159 FORMAT 8262 G g 103 G 71 Table 6 8263 H h 104 H 72 38 8264 I i 105 I 73 i 151 8265 J j 106 J 74 190 8266 K k 107 K 75 124 KEY 8267 L l 108 L 76 34 8268 M m 109 M 77 59 8269 N n 110 N 78 Table 7 NEW 8270 O o 111 O 79 Table 8 OPEN 8271 P p 112 P 80 _ 95 ...

Страница 931: ...E 8275 T t 116 T 84 35 TBLSET 8276 U u 117 U 85 Table 9 8277 V v 118 V 86 157 PASTE 8278 W w 119 W 87 33 Y 8279 X x 120 X 88 169 CUT 8280 Y y 121 Y 89 4 18 TABLE 8281 Z z 122 Z 90 CAPS 8282 Key Modifier None 2 8 Assoc Value Assoc Value Assoc Value Assoc Value ...

Страница 932: ...la Letters prefixed by 2 C Key Normal 2 C 338 16722 4434 8530 33106 B 340 16724 4436 8532 33108 D 344 16728 4440 8536 33112 A 337 16721 4433 8529 33105 C and A 339 16723 4435 8531 33107 C and B 342 16726 4438 8534 33110 D and A 345 16729 4441 8537 33113 D and B 348 16732 4444 8540 33116 Key Assoc Normal A à 224 192 E è 232 200 I ì 236 204 O ò 242 210 U ù 249 217 Key Assoc Normal C ç 231 199 ...

Страница 933: ... Greek Letters prefixed by 2 G Key Assoc Normal Û A á 225 193 E é 233 201 I í 237 205 O ó 243 211 U ú 250 218 Y ý 253 221 Key Assoc Normal Û A α 128 B β 129 D δ 133 132 E ε 134 F φ 145 G γ 131 130 L λ 137 M μ 181 P π 140 139 R ρ 141 S σ 143 142 T τ 144 W ω 148 147 X ξ 138 Y ψ 146 Z ζ 135 ...

Страница 934: ...ble 8 Caret Letters prefixed by 2 O Table 9 Umlaut Letters prefixed by 2 U Key Assoc Normal Û N ñ 241 209 O õ 245 Key Assoc Normal A â 226 194 E ê 234 202 I î 238 206 O ô 244 212 U û 251 219 Key Assoc Normal Û A ä 228 196 E ë 235 203 I ï 239 207 O ö 246 214 U ü 252 220 Y ÿ 255 ...

Страница 935: ...he form that you can enter depends on the current Angle mode Use the following methods to enter a complex number The point can be expressed in rectangular form or in either of two polar The i symbol represents the imaginary numberÁ 1 You can use the form When the Angle mode setting is a bi Radian Degree or Gradian reiq Radian only In Degree or Gradian angle mode this form causes a Domain error r ù...

Страница 936: ... not use the re iq polar form in Degree angle mode It will cause a Domain error Note To get the e symbol press TI89 Titanium s Voyage 200 2 s Do not simply type an alphabetic e Tip To get the ù symbol press 2 Õ Tip To enter q in degrees for r ùq you can type a ó symbol such as 45ó To get the ósymbol press 2 Ò You should not use degrees or Gradian for re iq Voyage 200 R 2 s 2 Ï d Ð or c R 2 ÕÏ d Fo...

Страница 937: ...thmic or hyperbolic functions In Degree angle mode complex identities such as e iq cos q i sin q are not generally true because the values for cos and sin are converted to radians while those for e are not For example e i45 cos 45 i sin 45 is treated internally as e i45 cos π 4 i sin π 4 Complex identities are always true in Radian angle mode Note If you use Degree angle mode you must make polar e...

Страница 938: ...ixels x is calculated as xmax N xmin of x pixels N1 If x is entered from the Home screen or a program xmax is calculated as xmin x ù of x pixels N 1 Note For a table that lists the number of pixels in a full screen or split screen refer to Setting and Exiting the Split Screen Mode in Split Screens The Window variable ymin is the center of the bottom pixel used and ymax is the center of the top pix...

Страница 939: ...q eyef eyeψ ncontour qmin qmax qstep tmin tmax tstep t0 tplot ncurves diftol dtime Estep fldpic fldres nmin nmax plotStrt plotStep sysMath zxmin zxmax zxscl zxgrid zymin zymax zyscl zygrid zxres zqmin zqmax zqstep ztmin ztmax ztstep zt0de ztmaxde ztstepde ztplotde zzmin zzmax zzscl zeyeq zeyef zeyeψ znmin znmax zpltstrt zpltstep x y Gx sx Gx2 Gxy Gy sy Gy2 corr maxX maxY medStat medx1 medx2 medx3 ...

Страница 940: ...o the priorities described below Order of Evaluation tblStart tbl tblInput c1 c99 sysData main ok errornum eqn exp Leve l Operator 1 Parentheses brackets braces 2 Indirection 3 Function calls 4 Post operators degrees minutes seconds factorial percentage radian ô subscript transpose î 5 Exponentiation power operator 6 Negation ë 7 String concatenation 8 Multiplication ù division 9 Addition subtract...

Страница 941: ...he variable name xyz Indirection also allows the creation and modification of variables from inside a program For example if 10 r and r s1 then s1 10 Post Operators Post operators are operators that come directly after an argument such as 5 25 or 60ó15 45 Arguments followed by a post operator are evaluated at the fourth priority level For example in the expression 4 3 3 is evaluated first The resu...

Страница 942: ... as possible For example y a sin bx c d is the model equation for SinReg So its residual expression is a sin bxi c d yi For SinReg therefore the least squares algorithm finds the constants a b c and d that minimize the function Regressions Regression Description CubicReg Uses the least squares algorithm to fit the third order polynomial y ax3 bx2 cx d For four data points the equation is a polynom...

Страница 943: ... least squares algorithm and transformed values ln x and ln y to fit the model equation y axb QuadReg Uses the least squares algorithm to fit the second order polynomial y ax2 bx c For three data points the equation is a polynomial fit for four or more it is a polynomial regression At least three data points are required QuartReg Uses the least squares algorithm to fit the fourth order polynomial ...

Страница 944: ...reated similarly Runge Kutta Method For Runge Kutta integrations of ordinary differential equations the TI 89 Titanium Voyage 200 uses the Bogacki Shampine 3 2 formula as found in the journal Applied Math Letters 2 1989 pp 1 9 For each rectangle the equation is evaluated at each of the four corners also called vertices or grid points and an average value E is calculated E At each of the five point...

Страница 945: ...ally For a thorough discussion of how this can be done refer to Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential Equations by L F Shampine New York Chapman Hall 1994 The TI 89 Titanium Voyage 200 software does not adjust the step size to land on particular output points Rather it takes the biggest steps that it can based on the error tolerance diftol and obtains results for xn x xn 1 using the cubic in...

Страница 946: ...cator To avoid loss of data do not remove the lithium battery unless four fresh alkaline batteries are installed Replace the lithium backup battery about every three or four years Note To avoid loss of information stored in memory the TI 89 Titanium Voyage 200 must be off Do not remove the alkaline batteries and the lithium battery at the same time Effects of Replacing the Batteries If you do not ...

Страница 947: ...um Battery in the TI 89 Titanium To replace the lithium backup battery remove the battery cover and unscrew the tiny screw holding the BACK UP BATTERY cover in place Remove the old battery and install a new WR44SW or 303 battery positive side up Replace the cover and the screw Lithium battery cover AAA alkaline batteries Replacing the Alkaline Batteries in the Voyage 200 1 If the Voyage 200 is on ...

Страница 948: ...move the battery cover Insert a blunt object into the circular indentation next to the battery Gently place a finger on the lithium battery and pry the battery out Slide in a new CR1616 or CR1620 battery positive side up Press firmly to snap the new lithium battery into place AAA alkaline battery compartment Lithium battery ...

Страница 949: ...atteries as soon as possible The BUSY indicator is displayed A calculation is in progress If you want to stop the calculation press The PAUSE indicator is displayed A graph or program is paused and the TI 89 Titanium Voyage 200 is waiting for input press An error message is displayed Refer to the list of error messages in this module Press N to clear The TI 89 Titanium Voyage 200 does not appear t...

Страница 950: ...he four AAA batteries 2 Press and hold and d as you reinstall the battery 3 Continue holding and d for five seconds before releasing The Voyage 200 appears to be locked up and will not respond to keyboard input The following action clears RAM This erases all data programs and user defined variables functions or folders Press and hold 2 and Then press and release The following action clears RAM and...

Страница 951: ...hen switch to the Italian Language mode the program will produce an error To avoid this error you must substitute digits for the alpha characters These digits operate in all languages This appendix contains the digit substitutions for these strings The following examples show how to substitute digits in the setMode function Example 1 A program using alpha parameter mode strings setMode Graph Seque...

Страница 952: ...uide 952 setMode and getMode Parameter Mode Setting Strings ALL 0 Graph 1 FUNCTION 1 PARAMETRIC 2 POLAR 3 SEQUENCE 4 3D 5 DIFF EQUATIONS 6 DisplayDigits 2 FIX 0 1 FIX 1 2 FIX 2 3 FIX 3 4 FIX 4 5 FIX 5 6 FIX 6 7 FIX 7 8 FIX 8 9 ...

Страница 953: ...53 FIX 9 10 FIX 10 11 FIX 11 12 FIX 12 13 FLOAT 14 FLOAT 1 15 FLOAT 2 16 FLOAT 3 17 FLOAT 4 18 FLOAT 5 19 FLOAT 6 20 FLOAT 7 21 FLOAT 8 22 FLOAT 9 23 FLOAT 10 24 FLOAT 11 25 FLOAT 12 26 Angle 3 RADIAN 1 Parameter Mode Setting Strings ...

Страница 954: ...RADIAN 3 Exponential Format 4 NORMAL 1 SCIENTIFIC 2 ENGINEERING 3 Complex Format 5 REAL 1 RECTANGULAR 2 POLAR 3 Vector Format 6 RECTANGULAR 1 CYLINDRICAL 2 SPHERICAL 3 Pretty Print 7 OFF 1 ON 2 SplitScreen 8 FULL 1 Parameter Mode Setting Strings ...

Страница 955: ... applications are not numbered Split2App 10 applications are not numbered Number of Graphs 11 1 1 2 2 Parameter Mode Setting Strings Graph 2 12 FUNCTION 1 PARAMETRIC 2 POLAR 3 SEQUENCE 4 3D 5 DIFF_EQUATIONS 6 Split Screen Ratio 13 1 1 1 1 2 2 Parameter Mode Setting Strings ...

Страница 956: ...Appendix C Programmer s Guide 956 2 1 3 Exact Approx 14 AUTO 1 EXACT 2 APPROXIMATE 3 Base 15 DEC 1 HEX 2 BIN 3 Parameter Mode Setting Strings ...

Страница 957: ...er s Guide 957 setGraph setGraph setGraph setGraph Parameter Mode Setting Strings Coordinates 1 RECT 1 POLAR 2 OFF 3 Graph Order 2 SEQ 1 SIMUL 2 Grid 3 OFF 1 ON 2 Axes 4 In 3D Mode OFF 1 AXES 2 BOX 3 Not in 3D Mode OFF 1 ...

Страница 958: ...ppendix C Programmer s Guide 958 ON 2 Leading Cursor 5 OFF 1 ON 2 Labels 6 OFF 1 ON 1 Seq Axes 7 TIME 1 WEB 2 Custom 3 Solution Method 8 RK 1 EULER 2 Fields 9 SLPFLD 1 DIRFLD 2 FLDOFF 3 DE Axes 10 TIME 1 ...

Страница 959: ...Appendix C Programmer s Guide 959 Y1 VS Y2 2 T VS Y 3 Y VS Y 4 Y1 VS Y2 5 Y1 VS Y2 6 XR Style 11 WIRE FRAME 1 HIDDEN SRUFACE 2 CONTOUR LEVELS 3 WIRE AND CONTOUR 4 IMPLICIT PLOT 5 ...

Страница 960: ...960 setTable setTable setTable setTable Parameter Mode Setting Strings Graph Table 1 OFF 1 ON 2 Independent 2 AUTO 1 ASK 2 Axes 4 ...

Страница 961: ...ormation For general information For general information For general information For technical support For technical support For technical support For technical support Home Page education ti com education ti com KnowledgeBase and e mail inquires education ti com support education ti com support Phone 800 TI CARES 800 842 2737 For U S Canada Mexico Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands only International...

Страница 962: ...ranty Duration This TI electronic product is warranted to the original purchaser for a period of one 1 year from the original purchase date Warranty Coverage This TI electronic product is warranted against defective materials and con struction THIS WARRANTY IS VOID IF THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN DAMAGED BY ACCIDENT OR UNREASONABLE USE NEGLECT IMPROPER SERVICE OR OTHER CAUSES NOT ARISING OUT OF DEFECTS IN...

Страница 963: ...placement unit will continue for the warranty of the original unit or six 6 months whichever is longer Other than the postage requirement no charge will be made for such repair and or replacement TI strongly recommends that you insure the product for value prior to mailing Software Software is licensed not sold TI and its licensors do not warrant that the software will be free from errors or meet ...

Страница 964: ...by the consumer or any other user Except as expressly provided in the One Year Limited Warranty for this product Texas Instruments does not promise that facilities for the repair of this product or parts for the repair of this product will be available Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or conse quential damages so the above limitations or exclusions ...

Страница 965: ... Battery Precautions Battery Precautions Battery Precautions Take these precautions when replacing batteries Do not leave batteries within the reach of children Do not mix new and used batteries Do not mix brands or types within brands of batteries Do not mix rechargeable and non rechargeable batteries Install batteries according to polarity and diagrams Do not place non rechargeable batteries in ...

Страница 966: ...t or right from cursor 2 C 2 D Page up or page down in editors 2 A 2 B Move cursor far left or far right Á Äƒ c Access Greek letters see next column d comment b Copy graph coordinates to sysdata e factorial Í Display FORMATS dialog box 1 6 Run programs kbdprgm1 through kbdprgm6 p append On screen keyboard map Turn off unit so that it returns to current application the next time you turn it on µ ze...

Страница 967: ... F Display FORMATS dialog box H Copy graph coordinates to Home screen history N Create new variable O Open existing variable S Save copy as Ç Lighten or darken contrast Calculate approximate answer Turn off unit so that it returns to current application the next time you turn it on 1 6 Run programs kbdprgm1 through kbdprgm6 2 X comment Á Äƒ µ zero _ C Move cursor to top D Move cursor to bottom 2 A...

Страница 968: ...eral lowercase letters 2 End several lowercase letters j Several uppercase letters 2 CAPS End several uppercase letters j 2 CAPS FUNCTION KEYS F6 2 ˆ ˆ F7 2 F8 2 Š Š NAVIGATION Scroll tall objects up or down in history C D C D Move cursor far left or far right on entry line 2 A 2 B 2 A 2 B Diagonal movement C and A C and B D and A D and B C and A C and B D and A D and B FUNCTIONS Display Home scre...

Страница 969: ... Home screen history H Grave à è ì ò ù 2 5 2 A a e i o u Cedilla ç 2 5 6 2 C c Acute á é í ó ú ý 2 5 2 E a e i o u y Tilde ã ñ õ 2 5 6 2 N a n o Caret â ê î ô û 2 5 2 O a e i o u Umlaut ä ë ï ö ü ÿ 2 5 2 U a e i o u y Question mark 2 3 2 Q β Beta 2 5 6 2 S Indirection 2 3 2 T Append p times 2 H Arbitrary 2 R Not equal to symbol Á 2 V Factorial e 2 W Comment Circle C d 2 X New ƒ 3 N Open ƒ 1 O Save...

Страница 970: ...908 negate 902 subtract 899 angle 907 dot multiplication 902 dot addition 901 dot subtraction 901 dot division 902 dot power 902 divide 900 less than 604 903 insufficient display memory 227 equal 604 903 greater than 604 904 negation key 16 arbitrary integer 274 275 list list difference 834 tbl table increment 456 tmpCnv temperature range conversion 284 888 x window variable 323 y window variable ...

Страница 971: ...display as cylindrical vector 800 4DD display as decimal angle 802 4Dec display as decimal integer 680 802 4DMS display as degree minute second 808 4Hex display as hexadecimal 680 826 4Polar display as polar vector 850 4Rect display as rectangular vector 860 4Sphere display as spherical vector 879 7 shift modifier key description 14 status 39 8 diamond modifier key description 14 status 39 8 F FOR...

Страница 972: ...e 763 783 absolute value abs 763 accent marks CHAR menu 19 accented characters 655 657 658 accessory port 66 accuracy 937 add 898 Algebra menu 253 256 algebra operations 779 All category 33 and Boolean and 247 684 783 and picture AndPic 628 and Boolean and 247 605 684 AndPic and picture 784 Angle mode 185 303 919 angle mode 20 status 39 angle angle 784 angle 907 ans last answer 785 answer last ans...

Страница 973: ...ssembly language 641 644 813 asymptotes faux detecting 90 augment augment concatenate 743 785 augment concatenate augment 743 Auto mode 163 186 200 240 921 AUTO mode status 39 Automatic Power Down APD feature during calculation or program 9 in OS download mode 68 turning on after 9 automatic simplification 242 automatic tables 459 auto paste 28 210 218 avgRC average rate of change 786 axes sequenc...

Страница 974: ... 49 turning off the calculator 8 calculator software applications Apps 6 icons 5 Calculator Based Laboratory system connecting 67 Calculator Based Laboratory See CBL Calculator Based Ranger See CBR Calculator Based Ranger system connecting 67 calculus operations 779 Catalog 2 E commands 24 description 23 exiting 26 key command 19 CATALOG menu 189 categories All 33 Apps desktop 33 customizing 34 En...

Страница 975: ... Greek 11 19 50 656 659 international accented 11 19 50 math 11 19 50 numeric code ord 602 punctuation 50 special 11 19 50 655 657 string char 602 symbols 657 uppercase 11 14 uppercase lowercase 152 650 checkTmr check timer 788 circle drawing 493 graphing 85 88 circle Circle 631 Circle draw circle 631 788 Circular definition error 595 Clean Up menu 187 clear drawing ClrDraw 630 error ClrErr 636 gr...

Страница 976: ...mat mode 185 919 complex format mode 20 Complex menu 255 conj complex conjugate 792 connecting computer 66 devices 66 TI ViewScreen overhead panel 67 TI Presenter video adapter 67 Voyage 200 66 Constant Memory 145 Constant Memory feature 20 constants 277 predefined 290 contact information 961 contour plots 395 399 400 DrwCtour draw contour 399 contour level graphing 102 394 943 contrast adjusting ...

Страница 977: ...y area 28 location following APD 9 moving 16 148 169 off the curve 384 Selecting a command 25 trace 318 Viewing entries 28 cursor keys ABCD additional functions 16 entering commands 25 function 16 opening Apps 30 selecting entry answer pairs 28 used with the hand key 15 using the CHAR menu 12 CustmOff custom toolbar off 228 799 CustmOn custom toolbar on 228 799 CUSTOM 2 F menu 56 descripton 55 key...

Страница 978: ...r 621 888 Define define 356 412 446 738 803 define Define 222 269 306 348 356 377 412 446 472 479 591 596 627 738 803 DEG degree mode 39 degree notation 760 907 908 degree minute second display 4DMS 808 delete character 0 8 19 deleting folder DelFold 596 804 variable DelVar 236 268 596 600 804 variables of type 704 deleting variables 142 DelFold delete folder 596 804 DelType command 704 DelVar del...

Страница 979: ... DIRFLD direction field 414 423 450 discontinuities detecting 90 Disp display I O screen 129 582 620 635 807 DispG display graph 620 627 807 DispHome display Home screen 620 807 display graph DispG 620 627 807 Home screen DispHome 620 807 I O screen Disp 129 582 620 635 807 table DispTbl 620 627 808 display as binary 4Bin 680 786 cylindrical vector 4Cylind 800 decimal angle 4DD 802 decimal integer...

Страница 980: ...raw slope 495 631 809 drop down menu DropDown 622 DropDown drop down menu 622 809 DrwCtour draw contour 399 632 810 dtime window variable 417 E E exponent 16 810 e natural log base 276 e e to a power 810 editing 169 eigVc eigenvector 811 eigVl eigenvalue 811 else if ElseIf 478 607 Else else 827 else Else 607 ElseIf else if 607 811 end custom EndCustm 622 799 dialog EndDlog 621 806 for EndFor 582 6...

Страница 981: ... evaluate polynomial polyEval 850 EXACT mode status 39 exact exact 812 Exact Approx mode 163 186 200 238 239 240 921 exact approx mode 20 example changing mode settings 21 editing categories 35 restoring the default custom menu 56 selecting menu options 51 turning off the clock 48 turning on off the custom menu 56 using dialog boxes 54 using the CHAR menu 12 using the keyboard map 13 examples prev...

Страница 982: ... rational factors 769 real factors 769 reducing expressions 73 sampling 771 second order differential equation 427 444 sequence graphing 96 solving inequalities 75 solving linear equations 74 258 split screen 112 760 standard annuity 765 statistics 117 symbolic manipulation 79 tables 110 text operations 130 third order differential equation 431 time value of money 767 trees and forest 96 tutorial ...

Страница 983: ... 72 238 254 257 741 769 factorial 71 904 factoring 257 activity 769 false message 273 family of curves 479 FCC statement 2 Fibonacci sequence 372 field off FLDOFF 414 424 451 field picture fldpic 418 File new 8 N 18 File open 8 O 18 Fill matrix fill 816 Flash applications 178 192 271 688 689 692 deleting 721 FLASH APPLICATIONS 8 O accessing Apps not listed 58 description 50 key command 18 Flash up...

Страница 984: ... mode 39 Func program function 587 820 function keys moving among toolbar menus 55 selecting categories 30 32 selecting menus 49 functions 23 156 delayed simplification 245 graphing 300 maximum fMax 238 264 817 minimum fMin 238 264 817 multistatement 477 off FnOff 308 627 818 on FnOn 308 627 818 part fPart 820 program function Func 587 820 user defined 193 220 269 377 475 477 585 587 803 G Garbage...

Страница 985: ...al variables 600 go to Goto 593 609 616 Goto go to 826 GRAD gradian mode 78 Gradian angle mode 78 graph mode 20 39 number mode 39 Graph 2 mode 186 921 GRAPH FORMATS 8 F 18 dialog box 18 Graph mode 185 200 301 340 347 355 376 411 918 graph mode status 39 graph number mode status 39 Graph Order graph format 314 413 Graph graph 826 graph Graph 306 473 480 628 Graph Table table graph 456 graphing cate...

Страница 986: ...ric 345 pausing 316 pictures 497 499 piecewise functions 475 pixels 937 polar 338 programs 627 QuickCenter 321 recall graph database RclGDB 629 860 selecting functions 307 348 357 412 sequence 353 373 setting setGraph 617 628 867 Shade 330 335 shading Shade 632 871 simultaneous graphs 481 split screen 482 486 506 store graph database StoGDB 629 880 style Style 628 881 Tangent 329 334 344 352 text ...

Страница 987: ...ory area 205 206 663 History indicator 29 Home icon 26 Home screen 203 Home screen See calculator home screen hyperbolic arccosine cosh 794 arcsine sinh 875 arctangent tanh 885 cosecant csch 796 cosine cosh 794 cotangent coth 795 secant sech 865 sine sinh 875 tangent tanh 884 I I O port 66 ID list 732 733 734 ID number 230 727 728 729 732 733 734 identity matrix identity 827 identity identity matr...

Страница 988: ...ed characters 11 Intersection graph math tool 329 331 inverse cosecant csc 796 inverse cotangent cot 795 inverse hyperbolic cosecant csch 796 cotangent coth 795 secant sech 865 inverse x 909 iPart integer part 829 isArchiv is archived 693 isClkOn is clock on 830 isLocked is locked 693 isPrime prime test 830 isVAR is variable 693 Item menu item 622 624 831 K key commands keyboard map 13 special cha...

Страница 989: ... to calculator 632 715 716 718 724 725 726 727 cancelling 721 errors 721 731 Flash applications 716 717 718 723 724 folders 716 717 719 720 721 get return CBL CBR value Get 568 634 820 program 632 724 725 send chat SendChat 724 725 send list variable Send 634 865 send to calculator SendCalc 633 724 725 variables 716 717 718 719 720 LinReg linear regression 546 834 941 list difference list 834 list...

Страница 990: ...pper decomposition 837 M mat4list matrix to list 838 math category 33 MATH menu 329 MATH menu 2 I 50 math operations 26 780 matrices augment concatenate augment 743 785 column dimension colDim 791 column norm colNorm 791 copying 537 cumulative sum cumSum 798 data from a graph 469 determinant det 806 diagonal diag 806 dimension dim 807 dot addition 901 dot division 902 dot multiplication 902 dot po...

Страница 991: ...um medium line regression MedMed 546 839 942 MedMed medium medium line regression 546 839 942 memory archiving Archive 596 707 708 785 checking 688 689 insufficient display memory 227 resetting 688 689 unarchive Unarchiv 597 707 708 889 VARLINK screen 690 692 693 694 695 697 698 699 700 707 MEMORY 2 19 Memory zoom 324 327 Memory error 712 menu item Item 622 624 831 Menus APPLICATIONS O 50 58 menus...

Страница 992: ... 240 921 Base 20 186 922 Complex Format 185 919 complex format 20 current 20 Current folder 185 918 Custom Units 922 custom units 20 DE differential equation 39 DEG degree 39 Display Digits 166 185 918 display digits 20 EXACT 39 Exact Approx 163 186 200 238 239 240 921 exact approx 20 Exponential Format 167 185 919 exponential format 20 fullscreen 19 32 37 61 63 64 FUNC function 39 get return getM...

Страница 993: ... window variable 416 nDeriv numeric derivative 264 841 negate M 153 902 negation key 5 16 negative numbers 16 new data NewData 569 597 841 folder NewFold 597 842 list newList 842 matrix newMat 842 picture NewPic 597 629 842 plot NewPlot 556 628 843 problem NewProb 188 843 New file 8 N 18 NewData new data 518 531 569 597 841 NewFold new folder 597 842 newList new list 842 newMat new matrix 842 NewP...

Страница 994: ...ading 727 728 729 operators 156 or Boolean or 684 or Boolean or 605 684 846 ord numeric character code 602 846 Organizr organizer category 33 OS 727 728 729 OS Operating System version 231 232 Out of memory error 271 Output output 846 output Output 620 627 overwrite mode 2 19 P P4Rx rectangular x coordinate 847 P4Ry rectangular y coordinate 847 panning 321 PAR parametric mode 39 parallelepiped act...

Страница 995: ...PlotsOff plots off 308 850 PlotsOn plots on 308 850 plotStep window variable 358 plotStrt window variable 358 point change PtChg 631 853 off PtOff 631 853 on PtOn 631 853 test ptTest 631 853 text PtText 631 854 POL polar mode 39 polar coordinate R4Pq 858 coordinate R4Pr 858 graphing 338 vector display 4Polar 850 polyEval evaluate polynomial 850 polynomials 257 265 activity 762 evaluate polyEval 85...

Страница 996: ...35 define dialog box Dialog 621 806 define toolbar Custom 622 799 define toolbar Toolbar 621 888 define Define 591 627 738 803 deleting 579 display graph DispG 620 627 807 display Home screen DispHome 620 807 display I O screen Disp 129 582 620 635 807 display table DispTbl 620 627 808 drop down menu DropDown 622 809 else if ElseIf 478 607 811 else Else 607 827 end custom EndCustm 622 799 end dial...

Страница 997: ...ss error PassErr 636 849 passing values 584 pause Pause 621 635 849 popup menu PopUp 620 850 prompt Prompt 620 852 request Request 620 622 861 return Return 589 592 862 running 572 stop Stop 579 880 stopping 573 subroutines 591 tables 627 text Text 621 622 886 Then Then 606 607 827 title Title 622 887 try Try 636 889 variables 593 while While 613 891 Prompt prompt 620 852 prompt Prompt 620 proper ...

Страница 998: ...eed RandSeed 743 859 number rand 858 polynomial randPoly 859 randPoly random polynomial 859 RandSeed random number seed 743 859 rational functions activity 751 RclGDB recall graph database 505 629 860 RclPic recall picture 629 860 real real 860 recall graph database RclGDB 505 629 860 picture RclPic 629 860 Recall 2 6 19 reciprocal x 909 rectangular x coordinate P4Rx 847 rectangular y coordinate P...

Страница 999: ...x row addition 863 rowDim matrix row dimension 863 rowNorm matrix row norm 864 rowSwap matrix row swap 864 RplcPic replace picture 629 864 rref reduced row echelon form 260 743 864 Runge Kutta method 413 435 944 S sampling activity 771 SAVE COPY AS 8 S description 18 dialog box 18 example 54 Scatter plots 555 scientific notation 16 154 scripts 208 660 663 activity 748 tutorial 748 scrolling 28 226...

Страница 1000: ...shade 632 871 shade Shade 632 Shift modifier key 7 description 14 status 39 shift shift 534 603 686 872 shift shift 603 686 show statistical results ShowStat 548 873 ShowStat show statistical results 548 873 sign sign 873 simplification delayed 245 rules 242 stopping 244 simult simultaneous equations 873 simultaneous equations simult 260 sin sine 874 sin arcsine 874 sinh hyperbolic sine 875 sinh h...

Страница 1001: ... viewing 20 square root 906 standard annuity activity 765 standard deviation stdDev 880 start timer startTmr 879 startTmr start timer 879 statistics 540 571 Box Plot 556 Calculation Type 541 545 categories 565 Category 541 543 combinations nCr 841 factorial 71 904 Freq 541 543 frequency 563 Histogram plots 557 mean mean 838 median median 838 new plot NewPlot 556 843 operations 782 overview 540 per...

Страница 1002: ...2 788 dimension dim 602 expression to string string 603 881 format format 602 620 627 819 indirection 602 906 940 inputting InputSt 601 619 725 left left 602 832 mid string mid 602 839 operations 600 602 782 right right 603 862 rotate rotate 603 862 shift shift 603 872 string to expression expr 601 602 620 814 within InString 602 829 Style style 881 style Style 310 628 subMat submatrix 882 submenu...

Страница 1003: ...h hyperbolic tangent 884 tanh hyperbolic arctangent 885 Taylor polynomial taylor 264 267 885 taylor Taylor polynomial 885 tblStart table start 456 tCollect trigonometric collection 886 temperature conversion tmpCnv 284 887 temperature range conversion tmpCnv 284 temperature range conversion tmpCnv 888 tExpand trigonometric expansion 886 text editing 645 655 660 cut copy paste 210 652 find 653 high...

Страница 1004: ...e trace 747 757 759 762 888 trace Trace 318 628 747 757 759 762 tracing 85 318 322 344 351 361 380 419 transmitting See linking and transmitting transpose T 883 Trig menu 255 trigonometric collection tCollect 255 expansion tExpand 255 trigonometric collection tCollect 886 trigonometric expansion tExpand 886 true message 273 Try try 889 try Try 636 tstep window variable 350 415 turning clock off Cl...

Страница 1005: ...r defined units 288 V Value graph math tool 329 330 352 381 420 variables 39 195 197 archiving and unarchiving 706 707 archiving Archive 596 707 708 785 clearing 678 copy CopyVar 596 702 792 copying 702 data 517 defined 233 670 delayed simplification 245 delete DelVar 236 268 596 600 804 deleting 721 DelType 704 in applications 704 705 local Local 589 594 596 597 835 locking Lock 597 locking unloc...

Страница 1006: ...ence 367 oscillation 368 WEB 356 362 363 WEB web plots 356 362 363 when when 890 when when 475 While while 891 while While 613 Window Editor 58 window variables x 937 y 937 diftol 417 dtime 417 Estep 417 eyeφ z axis 377 386 388 eyeθ x axis 377 386 388 eyeψ rotation 377 386 388 fldres 417 ncontour 378 ncurves 416 nmax 358 nmin 358 plotStep 358 plotStrt 358 qmax 341 qmin 341 qstep 342 t0 415 tmax 34...

Страница 1007: ...71 ygrid window variable 378 ymax window variable 311 342 358 378 416 937 ymin window variable 311 342 350 358 378 416 937 yscl window variable 311 342 350 358 416 Z Zero graph math tool 329 331 zeroes activity 762 zeroes zeroes 238 254 261 zeroes zeros 739 893 zeros zeroes 739 893 zmax window variable 378 zmin window variable 378 zoom box ZoomBox 323 325 894 data ZoomData 324 895 decimal ZoomDec ...

Страница 1008: ...ZoomFit zoom fit 896 ZoomIn zoom in 896 ZoomInt zoom integer 896 ZoomOut zoom out 897 ZoomPrev zoom previous 897 ZoomRcl zoom recall 897 ZoomSqr zoom square 897 ZoomStd zoom standard 898 ZoomSto zoom store 898 ZoomTrig zoom trig 898 ...

Результаты поиска

Содержание Voyage 200

Отзывы:

Похожие инструкции для Voyage 200

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды

Texas Instruments Voyage 200, Руководство пользователя

Результаты поиска

Содержание Voyage 200

Отзывы:

Похожие инструкции для Voyage 200

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды